advertisement
![Rigol DS2000A Series, MSO2000A Series User Manual | Manualzz Rigol DS2000A Series, MSO2000A Series User Manual | Manualzz](http://s3.manualzz.com/store/data/060024031_1-6080e1f566a924dea30da70c593158a4-360x466.png)
RIGOL
User’s Guide
MSO2000A/DS2000A
Series
Digital Oscilloscope
Aug. 2015
RIGOL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Guaranty and Declaration
Copyright
© 2013 RIGOL Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Trademark Information
RIGOL is a registered trademark of RIGOL Technologies, Inc.
Publication Number
UGA18108-1110
Software Version
00.03.03.SP2
Software upgrade might change or add product features. Please acquire the latest version of the manual from RIGOL website or contact RIGOL to upgrade the software.
Notices
RIGOL products are covered by P.R.C. and foreign patents, issued and pending.
RIGOL reserves the right to modify or change parts of or all the specifications and pricing policies at company’s sole decision.
Information in this publication replaces all previously corresponding material.
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.
RIGOL shall not be liable for either incidental or consequential losses in connection with the furnishing, use or performance of this manual as well as any information contained.
Any part of this document is forbidden to be copied, photocopied or rearranged without prior written approval of RIGOL .
Product Certification
RIGOL guarantees this product conforms to the national and industrial standards in
China as well as the ISO9001:2008 standard and the ISO14001:2004 standard.
Other international standard conformance certification is in progress.
Contact Us
If you have any problem or requirement when using our products or this manual, please contact RIGOL .
E-mail: [email protected]
Website: www.rigol.com
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Safety Requirement
General Safety Summary
Please review the following safety precautions carefully before putting the instrument into operation so as to avoid any personal injury or damage to the instrument and any product connected to it. To prevent potential hazards, please follow the instructions specified in this manual to use the instrument properly.
Use Proper Power Cord.
Only the exclusive power cord designed for the instrument and authorized for use within the local country could be used.
Ground the Instrument.
The instrument is grounded through the Protective Earth lead of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, connect the earth terminal of the power cord to the Protective
Earth terminal before connecting any input or output terminals.
Connect the Probe Correctly.
If a probe is used, the probe ground lead must be connected to earth ground. Do not connect the ground lead to high voltage. Improper way of connection could result in dangerous voltages being present on the connectors, controls or other surfaces of the oscilloscope and probes, which will cause potential hazards for operators.
Observe All Terminal Ratings.
To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings and markers on the instrument and check your manual for more information about ratings before connecting the instrument.
Use Proper Overvoltage Protection.
Ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the operator might be exposed to the danger of an electric shock.
II
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Do Not Operate Without Covers.
Do not operate the instrument with covers or panels removed.
Do Not Insert Objects Into the Air Outlet.
Do not insert objects into the air outlet, as doing so may cause damage to the instrument.
Use Proper Fuse.
Please use the specified fuses.
Avoid Circuit or Wire Exposure.
Do not touch exposed junctions and components when the unit is powered on.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures.
If you suspect that any damage may occur to the instrument, have it inspected by
RIGOL authorized personnel before further operations.
Any maintenance, adjustment or replacement especially to circuits or accessories must be performed by
RIGOL authorized personnel.
Provide Adequate Ventilation.
Inadequate ventilation may cause an increase of temperature in the instrument, which would cause damage to the instrument. So please keep the instrument well ventilated and inspect the air outlet and the fan regularly.
Do Not Operate in Wet Conditions.
To avoid short circuit inside the instrument or electric shock, never operate the instrument in a humid environment.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
To avoid personal injuries or damage to the instrument, never operate the instrument in an explosive atmosphere.
Keep Instrument Surfaces Clean and Dry.
To avoid dust or moisture from affecting the performance of the instrument, keep the surfaces of the instrument clean and dry.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Prevent Electrostatic Impact.
Operate the instrument in an electrostatic discharge protective environment to avoid damage induced by static discharges. Always ground both the internal and external conductors of cables to release static before making connections.
Use the Battery Properly.
Do not expose the battery (if available) to high temperature or fire. Keep it out of the reach of children. Improper change of a battery (lithium battery) may cause an explosion. Use the RIGOL specified battery only.
Handle with Caution.
Please handle with care during transportation to avoid damage to keys, knobs, interfaces, and other parts on the panels.
IV
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Safety Terms and Symbols
Safety Notices in this Manual:
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not avoided, will result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or practice which, if not avoided, could result in damage to the product or loss of important data.
Safety Terms on the Product:
DANGER It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in injury or hazard immediately.
WARNING It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in potential injury or hazard.
CAUTION It calls attention to an operation, if not correctly performed, could result in damage to the product or other devices connected to the product.
Safety Symbols on the Product:
Hazardous
Voltage
Safety
Warning
Protective
Earth
Terminal
Chassis
Ground
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Test
Ground
RIGOL
Allgemeine Sicherheits Informationen
Überprüfen Sie diefolgenden Sicherheitshinweise sorgfältigumPersonenschädenoderSchäden am Gerätundan damit verbundenen weiteren Gerätenzu vermeiden. Zur Vermeidung vonGefahren, nutzen Sie bitte das
Gerät nur so, wiein diesem Handbuchangegeben.
Um Feuer oder Verletzungen zu vermeiden, verwenden Sie ein ordnungsgemäßes Netzkabel.
Verwenden Sie für dieses Gerät nur das für ihr Land zugelassene und genehmigte
Netzkabel.
Erden des Gerätes.
Das Gerät ist durch den Schutzleiter im Netzkabel geerdet. Um Gefahren durch elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden, ist es unerlässlich, die Erdung durchzuführen. Erst dann dürfen weitere Ein- oder Ausgänge verbunden werden.
Anschluss einesTastkopfes.
Die Erdungsklemmen der Sonden sindauf dem gleichen Spannungspegel des
Instruments geerdet. SchließenSie die Erdungsklemmen an keine hohe Spannung an.
Beachten Sie alle Anschlüsse.
Zur Vermeidung von Feuer oder Stromschlag, beachten Sie alle Bemerkungen und
Markierungen auf dem Instrument. Befolgen Sie die Bedienungsanleitung für weitere
Informationen, bevor Sie weitere Anschlüsse an das Instrument legen.
Verwenden Sie einen geeigneten Überspannungsschutz.
Stellen Sie sicher, daß keinerlei Überspannung (wie z.B. durch Gewitter verursacht) das Gerät erreichen kann. Andernfallsbestehtfür den Anwender die
GefahreinesStromschlages.
Nicht ohne Abdeckung einschalten.
Betreiben Sie das Gerät nicht mit entfernten Gehäuse-Abdeckungen.
VI
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Betreiben Sie das Gerät nicht geöffnet.
Der Betrieb mit offenen oder entfernten Gehäuseteilen ist nicht zulässig. Nichts in entsprechende Öffnungen stecken (Lüfter z.B.)
Passende Sicherung verwenden.
Setzen Sie nur die spezifikationsgemäßen Sicherungen ein.
Vermeiden Sie ungeschützte Verbindungen.
Berühren Sie keine unisolierten Verbindungen oder Baugruppen, während das Gerät in Betrieb ist.
Betreiben Sie das Gerät nicht im Fehlerfall.
Wenn Sie am Gerät einen Defekt vermuten, sorgen Sie dafür, bevor Sie das Gerät wieder betreiben, dass eine Untersuchung durch RIGOL autorisiertem Personal durchgeführt wird. Jedwede Wartung, Einstellarbeiten oder Austausch von Teilen am
Gerät, sowie am Zubehör dürfen nur von RIGOL autorisiertem Personal durchgeführt werden.
Belüftung sicherstellen.
Unzureichende Belüftung kann zu Temperaturanstiegen und somit zu thermischen
Schäden am Gerät führen. Stellen Sie deswegen die Belüftung sicher und kontrollieren regelmäßig Lüfter und Belüftungsöffnungen.
Nicht in feuchter Umgebung betreiben.
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschluß im Geräteinneren und Stromschlag betreiben Sie das
Gerät bitte niemals in feuchter Umgebung.
Nicht in explosiver Atmosphäre betreiben.
Zur Vermeidung von Personen- und Sachschäden ist es unumgänglich, das Gerät ausschließlich fernab jedweder explosiven Atmosphäre zu betreiben.
Geräteoberflächen sauber und trocken halten.
Um den Einfluß von Staub und Feuchtigkeit aus der Luft auszuschließen, halten Sie bitte die Geräteoberflächen sauber und trocken.
Schutz gegen elektrostatische Entladung (ESD).
Sorgen Sie für eine elektrostatisch geschützte Umgebung, um somit Schäden und
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Funktionsstörungen durch ESD zu vermeiden. Erden Sie vor dem Anschluß immer
Innen- und Außenleiter der Verbindungsleitung, um statische Aufladung zu entladen.
Die richtige Verwendung desAkku.
Wenneine Batterieverwendet wird, vermeiden Sie hohe Temperaturen bzw. Feuer ausgesetzt werden. Bewahren Sie es außerhalbder Reichweitevon Kindern auf.
UnsachgemäßeÄnderung derBatterie (Anmerkung: Lithium-Batterie) kann zu einer
Explosion führen. VerwendenSie nur von RIGOL angegebenenAkkus.
Sicherer Transport.
Transportieren Sie das Gerät sorgfältig (Verpackung!), um Schäden an
Bedienelementen, Anschlüssen und anderen Teilen zu vermeiden.
VIII
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Sicherheits Begriffe und Symbole
Begriffe in diesem Guide:
WARNING
Die Kennzeichnung WARNING beschreibt Gefahrenquellen die leibliche
Schäden oder den Tod von Personen zur Folge haben können.
CAUTION
Die Kennzeichnung Caution (Vorsicht) beschreibt Gefahrenquellen die
Schäden am Gerät hervorrufen können.
Begriffe auf dem Produkt:
DANGER weist auf eine Verletzung oder Gefährdung hin, die sofort geschehen kann.
WARNING weist auf eine Verletzung oder Gefährdung hin, die möglicherweise nicht sofort geschehen.
CAUTION weist auf eine Verletzung oder Gefährdung hin und bedeutet, dass eine mögliche Beschädigung des Instruments oder anderer
Gegenstände auftreten kann.
Symbole auf dem Produkt:
Gefährliche
Spannung
Sicherheits-
Hinweis
Schutz-erde Gehäusemasse Erde
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Measurement Category
Measurement Category
MSO2000A/DS2000A series digital oscilloscopes can make measurements in
Measurement Category I.
WARNING
This oscilloscope can only be used for measurements within its specified measurement categories.
Measurement Category Definitions
Measurement category I is for measurements performed on circuits not directly connected to MAINS. Examples are measurements on circuits not derived from
MAINS, and specially protected (internal) MAINS derived circuits. In the latter case, transient stresses are variable; for that reason, the transient withstand capability of the equipment is made known to the user.
Measurement category II is for measurements performed on circuits directly connected to the low voltage installation. Examples are measurements on household appliances, portable tools and similar equipment.
Measurement category III is for measurements performed in the building installation.
Examples are measurements on distribution boards, circuit-breakers, wiring, including cables, bus-bars, junction boxes, switches, socket-outlets in the fixed installation, and equipment for industrial use and some other equipment, for example. Stationary motors with permanent connection to the fixed installation.
Measurement category IV is for measurements performed at the source of the low-voltage installation. Examples are electricity meters and measurements on primary overcurrent protection devices and ripple control units.
X
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Ventilation Requirement
This oscilloscope uses fan to force cooling. Please make sure that the air intake and exhaust areas are free from obstructions and have free air. When using the oscilloscope in a bench-top or rack setting, provide at least 10 cm clearance beside, above and behind the instrument for adequate ventilation.
WARNING
Inadequate ventilation may cause temperature increase which would damage the instrument. So please keep the instrument well ventilated during operation and inspect the intake and fan regularly.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Working Environment
Temperature
Operating: 0 ℃ to +50 ℃
Non-operating: -40 ℃ to +70 ℃
Humidity
0 ℃ to +30 ℃ : ≤95% relative humidity
+30 ℃ to +40 ℃ : ≤75% relative humidity
+40 ℃ to +50 ℃ : ≤45% relative humidity
WARNING
To avoid short circuit inside the instrument or electric shock, please do not operate in humid environment.
Altitude
Operating: below 3 km
Non-operating: below 15 km
Installation (Overvoltage) Category
This product is powered by mains conforming to installation (overvoltage) category
II.
WARNING
Make sure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by thunderbolt) can reach the product, or else the operator might expose to danger of electric shock.
Installation (Overvoltage) Category Definitions
Installation (overvoltage) category I refers to signal level which is applicable to equipment measurement terminals connected to the source circuit. In these terminals, precautions are done to limit the transient voltage to the corresponding low level.
Installation (overvoltage) category II refers to the local power distribution level which is applicable to equipment connected to the AC line (AC power).
XII
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Pollution Degree
Degree 2
Pollution Degree Definitions
Pollution degree 1: No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution occurs. The pollution has no influence. For example: a clean room or air-conditioned office environment.
Pollution degree 2: Normally only dry, non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation may occur. For example: general indoor environment.
Pollution degree 3: Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non-conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation which is expected. For example: Sheltered outdoor environment.
Pollution degree 4: Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through conductive dust, rain, or snow. For example: outdoor locations.
Safety Class
Class 1 – Grounded Product
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
XIII [email protected]
RIGOL
General Care and Cleaning
General Care
Do not store or leave the instrument where it may be exposed to direct sunlight for long periods of time.
Cleaning
Clean the instrument regularly according to its operating conditions. To clean the exterior surface, perform the following steps:
1.
Disconnect the instrument from all power sources.
2.
Clean the loose dust on the outside of the instrument with a lint-free cloth (with a mild detergent or water). When cleaning the LCD, take care to avoid scarifying it.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the instrument, do not expose it to caustic liquids.
WARNING
To avoid short-circuit and personal injury resulting from moisture, make sure the instrument is completely dry before reconnecting it to power supply.
XIV
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Environmental Considerations
The following symbol indicates that this product complies with the WEEE Directive
2002/96/EC.
Product End-of-Life Handling
The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or human health. In order to avoid the release of such substances into the environment and harm to human health, we encourage you to recycle this product in an appropriate system that will ensure that most of the materials are reused or recycled appropriately. Please contact your local authorities for disposal or recycling information.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
MSO2000A/DS2000A Series Overview
MSO2000A is a mixed signal digital oscilloscope aimed at embedded system design and test. It allows users to measure both analog and digital signals.
MSO2000A/DS2000A series is a multifunctional and high-performance digital oscilloscope designed on the basis of the UltraVision technique developed by RIGOL .
It fulfills the design, debugging and test requirements of the mainstream application market.
Main features:
The unique Ultra Vision technique
Analog channels: 2 GSa/s real-time sample rate; 14 Mpts standard memory depth and up to 56 Mpts memory depth (option)
Digital channels: 1 GSa/s real-time sample rate; 14 Mpts memory depth (the deepest among MSOs of the same class)
50,000 wfms/s (dots display) waveform capture rate
Real-time hardware waveform recording, playback and analysis functions; up to
65000 frames of waveform can be recorded; support digital channel waveform recording and playback
256 degree gray scale display
Superb performance
300 MHz, 200 MHz, 100 MHz and 70 MHz analog channel bandwidth
2+16-channel mixed signal digital oscilloscope (MSO2000A)
Built-in dual-channel 25 MHz signal source (DS2000A-S and MSO2000A-S)
Low base noise, 500 μV/div to 10 V/div ultra-wide vertical dynamic range
Various functions
Various trigger functions
Various decoding functions
Various interfaces: USB Host, USB Device, LAN (LXI), AUX and USB-GPIB
(option)
29 waveform parameters auto measurement (with statistics)
Fine delayed sweep function
Built-in FFT function
Pass/fail test function
Waveform math operation functions
XVI
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Support USB storage device storage and PictBridge printer
Conform to LXI-C class instrument standards; enable quick, economic and efficient creation and reconfiguration of test system
Support remote command control
User-friendly design
8.0 inch WVGA (800*480) 160,000 color TFT LCD, with ultra-wide screen, vivid picture, low power consumption and long service life
Easy to use digital channel grouping and group operation functions
Adjustable waveform brightness
Auto setting of waveform display (AUTO)
Built-in help system
Support multiple languages menu, Chinese/English interface and
Chinese/English input
Novel and delicate industrial design and easier operation
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
XVII [email protected]
RIGOL
Document Overview
Main Topics of this Manual:
Chapter 1 Quick Start Introduce the preparations before using the oscilloscope and provide a basic introduction of the instrument.
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System Introduce the vertical system functions of
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal the oscilloscope.
Introduce the horizontal system functions of
System the oscilloscope.
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System Introduce the sample system functions of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope Introduce the trigger mode, trigger coupling, trigger holdoff, trigger source and various trigger types of the oscilloscope.
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements Introduce how to make math operation, cursor and auto measurements.
Chapter 7 Digital Channel Introduce how to use the digital channels of the mixed signal digital oscilloscope.
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
Chapter 9 Reference Waveform
Introduce how to decode the input signal using those common protocols.
Introduce how to compare the input waveform with the reference waveform.
Chapter 10 Pass/Fail Test
Chapter 11 Waveform Record
Chapter 12 Display Control
Chapter 13 Signal Source
Introduce how to monitor the input signal using the Pass/Fail test.
Introduce how to record waveform as well as how to play back and analyze the recorded waveform.
Introduce how to control the display of the oscilloscope.
Introduce how to use the built-in signal
Chapter 14 Store and Recall source.
Introduce how to store and recall the setting file, waveform file and so on.
Chapter 15 System Function Setting Introduce how to set the remote interface and system-related functions.
XVIII
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Chapter 16 Remote Control
Chapter 17 Troubleshooting
Introduce how to control the oscilloscope remotely.
Introduce how to deal with common failures
Chapter 18 Specifications of the oscilloscope.
Provide the specifications and general specifications of the oscilloscope.
Provide common information such as options Chapter 19 Appendix and accessories.
Format Conventions in this Manual:
1.
Key
The key at the front panel is denoted by the format of “Key Name (Bold) + Text
Box”. For example, Utility denotes the “Utility” key.
2.
Menu Softkey
The menu softkey is denoted by the format of “Menu Word (Bold) + Character
Shading”. For example, System denotes the “System” menu softkey under
Utility.
3.
Operation Step
The next step of operation is denoted by an arrow “ ”. For example, Utility
System denotes pressing Utility at the front panel and then pressing System.
4.
Knob
Label Knob
HORIZONTAL SCALE Horizontal Scale Knob
HORIZONTAL POSITION
Horizontal Position Knob
VERTICAL SCALE
Vertical Scale Knob
VERTICAL POSITION Vertical Position Knob
TRIGGER LEVEL
Trigger Level Knob
Multifunction Knob
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Content Conventions in this Manual:
MSO2000A/DS2000A series includes the following models. Unless otherwise noted, this manual takes MSO2302A-S for an example to illustrate the functions and operation methods of MSO2000A/DS2000A series.
Analog Number of Number of Source Number of Digital
Model
Bandwidth Channels Channels Channels
MSO2072A 70 MHz 2 -- 16
MSO2072A-S
MSO2102A
MSO2102A-S
MSO2202A
MSO2202A-S
MSO2302A
MSO2302A-S
DS2072A
DS2072A-S
DS2102A
DS2102A-S
DS2202A
DS2202A-S
DS2302A
DS2302A-S
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
70 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
200 MHz
200 MHz
300 MHz
300 MHz
70 MHz
70 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
200 MHz
200 MHz
300 MHz
300 MHz
2
--
2
--
2
--
--
2
2
--
2
2
--
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
XX
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Contents RIGOL
Contents
Guaranty and Declaration ......................................................................... I
Safety Requirement ................................................................................ II
General Safety Summary ........................................................................... II
Safety Terms and Symbols ........................................................................ V
Allgemeine Sicherheits Informationen ........................................................ VI
Sicherheits Begriffe und Symbole .............................................................. IX
Measurement Category ............................................................................. X
Ventilation Requirement ........................................................................... XI
Working Environment ............................................................................. XII
General Care and Cleaning ..................................................................... XIV
Environmental Considerations .................................................................. XV
MSO2000A/DS2000A Series Overview ................................................. XVI
Document Overview .......................................................................... XVIII
Chapter 1 Quick Start ............................................................................ 1-1
General Inspection ................................................................................ 1-2
Appearance and Dimensions ................................................................... 1-3
To Prepare the Oscilloscope for Use ......................................................... 1-4
To Adjust the Supporting Legs .......................................................... 1-4
To Connect to Power Supply............................................................. 1-4
Power-on Inspection ....................................................................... 1-5
To Connect the Probe ...................................................................... 1-5
Function Inspection ......................................................................... 1-7
Probe Compensation ....................................................................... 1-8
Front Panel Overview ............................................................................. 1-9
Rear Panel Overview ............................................................................. 1-11
Front Panel Function Overview............................................................... 1-13
VERTICAL ..................................................................................... 1-13
HORIZONTAL ................................................................................ 1-14
TRIGGER ...................................................................................... 1-15
CLEAR .......................................................................................... 1-16
RUN/STOP .................................................................................... 1-16
SINGLE ......................................................................................... 1-16
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Contents
AUTO ........................................................................................... 1-16
Multifunction Knob ......................................................................... 1-17
Navigation Knob ............................................................................ 1-17
Function Keys ................................................................................ 1-18
Signal Source ................................................................................ 1-19
Record .......................................................................................... 1-19
Print ............................................................................................. 1-20
Logic Analyzer ............................................................................... 1-20
User Interface ...................................................................................... 1-21
To Use the Security Lock ....................................................................... 1-26
To Use the Built-in Help System ............................................................. 1-27
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System ................................................... 2-1
To Enable the Analog Channel ................................................................. 2-2
Channel Coupling ................................................................................... 2-3
Bandwidth Limit ..................................................................................... 2-3
Probe Ratio ........................................................................................... 2-4
Input Impedance ................................................................................... 2-5
Waveform Invert .................................................................................... 2-5
Vertical Scale ......................................................................................... 2-6
Vertical Expansion .................................................................................. 2-7
Amplitude Unit ....................................................................................... 2-7
Channel Label ........................................................................................ 2-7
Delay Calibration of the Analog Channel ................................................... 2-9
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System ............................................... 3-1
Delayed Sweep ...................................................................................... 3-2
Time Base Mode .................................................................................... 3-4
Y-T Mode ........................................................................................ 3-4
X-Y Mode ........................................................................................ 3-4
Roll Mode ....................................................................................... 3-7
Horizontal Scale ..................................................................................... 3-8
Horizontal Reference .............................................................................. 3-9
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System .................................................... 4-1
Acquisition Mode .................................................................................... 4-2
Normal ........................................................................................... 4-2
Average .......................................................................................... 4-2
Peak Detect .................................................................................... 4-4
XXII
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Contents RIGOL
High Resolution .............................................................................. 4-4
Sample Mode ........................................................................................ 4-5
Sample Rate ......................................................................................... 4-6
LA Sample Rate ..................................................................................... 4-7
Memory Depth ...................................................................................... 4-8
LA Memory Depth .................................................................................. 4-9
Anti-Aliasing .......................................................................................... 4-9
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope ................................................... 5-1
Trigger Source ...................................................................................... 5-2
Trigger Mode ........................................................................................ 5-3
Trigger Coupling .................................................................................... 5-5
Trigger Holdoff ...................................................................................... 5-6
Noise Rejection ..................................................................................... 5-7
Trigger Type ......................................................................................... 5-8
Edge Trigger ................................................................................... 5-9
Pulse Trigger ................................................................................. 5-11
Runt Trigger .................................................................................. 5-14
Windows Trigger (Option) ............................................................... 5-17
Nth Edge Trigger (Option) ............................................................... 5-19
Slope Trigger ................................................................................. 5-21
Video Trigger (HDTV Option) ........................................................... 5-24
Pattern Trigger .............................................................................. 5-27
Delay Trigger (Option) .................................................................... 5-29
TimeOut Trigger (Option) ............................................................... 5-32
Duration Trigger (Option)................................................................ 5-34
Setup/Hold Trigger ......................................................................... 5-36
RS232 Trigger ................................................................................ 5-38
I2C Trigger .................................................................................... 5-41
SPI Trigger .................................................................................... 5-44
USB Trigger (Option) ...................................................................... 5-47
CAN Trigger (Option) ...................................................................... 5-49
Trigger Output Connector ...................................................................... 5-53
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements ..................................................... 6-1
Math Operation ..................................................................................... 6-2
Addition ......................................................................................... 6-2
Subtraction .................................................................................... 6-2
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
XXIII [email protected]
RIGOL Contents
Multiplication ................................................................................... 6-3
Division .......................................................................................... 6-3
FFT ................................................................................................ 6-5
Digital Filter .................................................................................... 6-8
Logic Operation ............................................................................. 6-10
Advanced Operation ....................................................................... 6-12
MATH Label................................................................................... 6-14
Auto Measurement ............................................................................... 6-15
Quick Measurement after AUTO ...................................................... 6-15
One-key Measurement of 29 Parameters .......................................... 6-17
Frequency Counter Measurement .................................................... 6-23
Measurement Setting ..................................................................... 6-24
To Clear the Measurement .............................................................. 6-26
All Measurement ............................................................................ 6-27
Statistic Function ........................................................................... 6-28
Measurement History ..................................................................... 6-28
Cursor Measurement ............................................................................ 6-29
Manual Mode ................................................................................ 6-30
Track Mode ................................................................................... 6-35
Auto Mode .................................................................................... 6-38
X-Y Mode ...................................................................................... 6-39
Chapter 7 Digital Channel ..................................................................... 7-1
To Select the Digital Channel ................................................................... 7-2
To Move the Digital Channel .................................................................... 7-2
To Turn on/off the Digital Channel ........................................................... 7-3
Group Set .............................................................................................. 7-4
To Set the Waveform Display Size ............................................................ 7-5
Reorder Setting ...................................................................................... 7-5
To Set the Threshold .............................................................................. 7-5
To Use the Digital Bus ............................................................................ 7-6
To Set the Label ..................................................................................... 7-7
Digital Channel Delay Calibration ............................................................. 7-8
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding ................................................................ 8-1
Parallel Decoding ................................................................................... 8-2
RS232 Decoding (Option) ....................................................................... 8-5
I2C Decoding (Option) .......................................................................... 8-10
XXIV
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Contents RIGOL
SPI Decoding (Option) .......................................................................... 8-14
CAN Decoding (Option) ......................................................................... 8-17
Chapter 9 Reference Waveform ............................................................ 9-1
To Enable REF Function.......................................................................... 9-2
To Set the Color .................................................................................... 9-2
To Select REF Source ............................................................................. 9-2
To Save REF Waveform .......................................................................... 9-3
To Adjust REF Waveform Display ............................................................. 9-3
To Export to Internal or External Memory ................................................ 9-3
To Import from Internal or External Memory ............................................ 9-4
Chapter 10 Pass/Fail Test ................................................................... 10-1
To Enable Pass/Fail Test ........................................................................ 10-2
To Select Source................................................................................... 10-2
Mask Range ......................................................................................... 10-2
To Set Test Results Output Type ............................................................. 10-4
To Save the Test Mask .......................................................................... 10-5
To Load the Test Mask .......................................................................... 10-5
Chapter 11 Waveform Record ............................................................. 11-1
Waveform Record ................................................................................. 11-2
Record Constant On.............................................................................. 11-4
Waveform Playback .............................................................................. 11-6
Waveform Analysis ............................................................................... 11-8
Analysis Based on Trace ............................................................... 11-12
Analysis Based on Pass/Fail Mask................................................... 11-13
Chapter 12 Display Control ................................................................. 12-1
To Select the Display Type ..................................................................... 12-2
To Set the Persistence Time .................................................................. 12-2
To Set the Waveform Intensity ............................................................... 12-4
To Set the Screen Grid .......................................................................... 12-4
To Set the Grid Brightness ..................................................................... 12-4
To Set the Menu Display ........................................................................ 12-4
Chapter 13 Signal Source .................................................................... 13-1
Parameter Setting Method ..................................................................... 13-2
To Output Basic Waveform .................................................................... 13-3
To Output Sine .............................................................................. 13-3
XXV MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Contents
To Output Square .......................................................................... 13-4
To Output Ramp ............................................................................ 13-5
To Output Pulse ............................................................................. 13-6
To Output DC ................................................................................ 13-6
To Output Noise ............................................................................ 13-7
To Output Built-in Waveform ................................................................. 13-8
To Output Arbitrary Waveform ............................................................. 13-12
To Select Waveform ..................................................................... 13-14
To Create Waveform .................................................................... 13-14
To Edit Waveform ........................................................................ 13-16
Modulation ........................................................................................ 13-19
AM ............................................................................................. 13-19
FM ............................................................................................. 13-21
Chapter 14 Store and Recall ............................................................... 14-1
Storage System .................................................................................... 14-2
Storage Type ....................................................................................... 14-3
Internal Storage and Recall ................................................................... 14-5
External Storage and Recall ................................................................... 14-7
Disk Management ................................................................................ 14-9
To Select File Type ......................................................................... 14-9
To Create a New File or Folder ...................................................... 14-10
To Delete a File or Folder .............................................................. 14-13
To Rename a File or Folder ........................................................... 14-14
To Clear the Local Memory ........................................................... 14-14
Factory.............................................................................................. 14-15
Chapter 15 System Function Setting .................................................. 15-1
Remote Interface Configuration ............................................................. 15-2
LAN Setting ................................................................................... 15-2
USB Device ................................................................................... 15-7
GPIB Address ................................................................................ 15-7
System-related .................................................................................... 15-8
Sound .......................................................................................... 15-8
Language ..................................................................................... 15-8
System Information ....................................................................... 15-9
Power-off Recall ............................................................................ 15-9
System Time ............................................................................... 15-10
XXVI
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Contents RIGOL
Screen ........................................................................................ 15-11
Self-calibration ............................................................................. 15-12
Print Setting ................................................................................ 15-13
Power Status ............................................................................... 15-15
Aux Output ................................................................................. 15-16
Option Management ..................................................................... 15-17
Auto Setting ................................................................................ 15-19
Chapter 16 Remote Control................................................................. 16-1
Remote Control via USB ........................................................................ 16-2
Remote Control via LAN ........................................................................ 16-6
Remote Control via GPIB ....................................................................... 16-8
Chapter 17 Troubleshooting................................................................ 17-1
Chapter 18 Specifications ................................................................... 18-1
Chapter 19 Appendix .......................................................................... 19-1
Appendix A: Accessories and Options ..................................................... 19-1
Appendix B: Warranty ........................................................................... 19-3
Index ....................................................................................................... 1
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
XXVII [email protected]
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
Chapter 1 Quick Start
This chapter introduces the precautions when using the oscilloscope for the first time, the front/rear panels of the oscilloscope, the user interface and the using method of the built-in help system.
The contents of this chapter:
General Inspection
Appearance and Dimensions
To Prepare the Oscilloscope for Use
Front Panel Overview
Rear Panel Overview
Front Panel Function Overview
User Interface
To Use the Security Lock
To Use the Built-in Help System
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
General Inspection
1.
Inspect the shipping container for damage.
Keep the damaged shipping container or cushioning material until the contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the instrument has passed both electrical and mechanical tests.
The consigner or carrier shall be liable for the damage to instrument resulting from shipment. RIGOL would not be responsible for free maintenance/rework or replacement of the unit.
2.
Inspect the instrument.
In case of any damage, or defect, or failure, notify your RIGOL sales representative.
3.
Check the Accessories
Please check the accessories according to the packing lists. If the accessories are incomplete or damaged, please contact your RIGOL sales representative.
1-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start
Appearance and Dimensions
361.6
RIGOL
Figure 1-1 Front View Unit: mm
Figure 1-2 Top View Unit: mm
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
To Prepare the Oscilloscope for Use
To Adjust the Supporting Legs
Adjust the supporting legs properly to use them as stands to tilt the oscilloscope upwards for stable placement of the oscilloscope as well as better operation and observation.
Figure 1-3 To Adjust the Supporting Legs
To Connect to Power Supply
The power requirements of the oscilloscope are 100-240 V, 45-440 Hz. Please use the power cord supplied with the accessories to connect the oscilloscope to the AC power source. When the oscilloscope is energized, the power key lower-left corner of the front panel is in breathing state.
at the
Power Socket
Figure 1-4 To Connect to Power Supply
1-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
Power-on Inspection
When the oscilloscope is energized, pressing the power key at the lower-left corner of the front panel can start the oscilloscope if the power status is currently set to “Default” and the oscilloscope will starts directly if the power status is currently set to “Open”. During the start-up process, the oscilloscope performs a series of self-tests and you can hear the sound of relay switching. After the self-test, the welcome screen is displayed. The instrument is installed with the trial versions of the options before leaving factory and the time left is about 2000 minutes. The “Installed
Options” dialog box will be displayed if your instrument currently installs the trial versions of options. From this dialog box you can view the type, name, edition and time left of each option currently installed.
To Connect the Probe
RIGOL provides passive probe for the DS2000A series as well as passive probe and logic probe for MSO2000A series. For the detailed technical information of the probes, please refer to the User’s Guide of the corresponding probes.
Connect the passive probe:
1.
Connect the BNC terminal of the probe to an input terminal of the analog channel of the oscilloscope at the front panel.
2.
Connect the ground alligator clip or the ground spring of the probe to the circuit ground terminal and connect the probe tip to the circuit point to be tested.
Figure 1-5 To Connect the Passive Probe
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
Connect the logic probe:
1.
Connect the single-wire terminal of the logic probe to the [LOGIC D0-D15] digital channel interface at the front panel of MSO2000A in the correct direction.
2.
Connect the signal under test to the other terminal of the logic probe. MSO2000A is provided with an RPL2316 logic probe which provides three connecting methods with the signal under test to fulfill the requirements of different application environment. For the details, please refer to the
RPL2316 Logic Probe
User’s Guide
.
Figure 1-6 To Connect the Logic Probe
1-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
Function Inspection
1.
Press Storage Default to restore the oscilloscope to its factory states.
2.
Connect the ground alligator clip of the probe to the “Ground Terminal” as shown in the figure below.
3.
Use the probe to connect the input terminal of CH1 of the oscilloscope and the
“Probe Compensation Signal Output Terminal”.
Probe Compensation Signal Output Terminal
Ground Terminal
Figure 1-7 Probe Compensation Signal Output Terminal/Ground Terminal
4.
Set the attenuation on the probe to 10X. Then press AUTO.
5.
Observe the waveform on the display. If the waveforms actually shown do not match that in the figure below, please perform “Probe Compensation”.
6.
Use the same method to test the other channels.
Figure 1-8 Probe Compensation Signal
WARNING
To avoid electric shock during the use of probe, please make sure that the insulated wire of the probe is in good condition and do not touch the metallic part of the probe when the probe is connected to high voltage source.
Tip
The probe compensation signal can only be used for probe compensation adjustment and can not be used for calibration.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
Probe Compensation
When the probes are used for the first time or when the probe compensation signal does not match that shown in Figure 8-1, you should compensate the probes to match the input channels of the oscilloscope. Non-compensated or poorly compensated probes may cause measurement error. The probe compensation procedures are as follows.
1.
Perform steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 of “Function Inspection”.
2.
Check the displayed waveforms and compare them with the following figures.
Over compensated Perfectly compensated Under compensated
Figure 1-9 Probe Compensation
3.
Use a nonmetallic driver to adjust the low-frequency compensation adjustment hole on the probe until the displayed waveform is as the “Perfectly compensated” in the figure above.
1-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
Front Panel Overview
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Figure 1-10 Front Panel Overview
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
Table 1-1 Front Panel Descriptions
No. Description No. Description
1 Measurement Menu Softkeys 13 Power Key
2 LCD 14 USB HOST Interface
3 Logic Analysis Control Key [1] 15 Digital Channel Input Interface [1]
4 Multifunction Knob 16 HORIZONTAL Control Area
5 Function Keys
6 Signal Source [2]
7
8
9
Navigation Knob
CLEAR
AUTO
10 RUN/STOP
11 SINGLE
17 Function Menu Softkeys
18 VERTICAL Control Area
19 Analog Channel Input Area
20
Waveform Record&Playback Control
Keys
21 TRIGGER Control Area
22
External Trigger Signal Input
Terminal [3]
23
Probe Compensation Signal Output
Terminal and Ground Terminal
-- -- 12 Help&Print
Note [1] : Only applicable to MSO2000A and MSO2000A-S models mixed signal digital oscilloscopes.
Note [2] : Only applicable to MSO2000A-S and DS2000A-S models digital oscilloscopes.
Note [3] : The input impedance of this channel is always “HighZ”.
1-10
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start
Rear Panel Overview
1 2 3
RIGOL
4 5 6 7 8
Figure 1-11 Rear Panel Overview
1
.
Handle
Pull up the handle vertically for easy carrying of the instrument. When you do not need the handle, press it down.
2
.
LAN
Connect the instrument to the network via this interface for remote control. This oscilloscope conforms to the LXI-C class instrument standards and you can quickly build test system using it with other instruments.
3 . USB DEVICE
PictBridge printer or PC can be connected via this interface to perform the print operation or control the instrument using PC software.
4 . Fuse
If a new fuse is required, please use the specified fuse (250V, T2A). The replacing method is as follows.
(1) Turn off the instrument and remove the power cord.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
1-11 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
(2) Insert a small straight screwdriver into the slot at the power socket and pry out the fuse seat gently.
(3) Take out the fuse and replace it with a fuse of the specified specification.
Then, reinstall the fuse seat.
5 . AC Power Socket
AC power input terminal. The power requirement of this oscilloscope is 100-240
V, 45-440 Hz. Use the power cord provided with the accessories to connect the instrument to AC power. Then, you can press the power key at the front panel to start the instrument.
6 . Lock Hole
You can lock the instrument to a fixed location using the security lock (please buy it yourself) via the lock hole.
7 . Trigger Out and Pass/Fail
Trigger Out
This connector will output a signal that can reflect the current capture rate of the oscilloscope at each trigger. Connect the signal to the waveform display device and measure the frequency of the signal. The measurement result is the same with the current capture rate.
Pass/Fail
During the pass/fail test, the oscilloscope will output a negative pulse via this connector each time a failed waveform is detected; the oscilloscope will output low level continuously via this connector when no failed waveform is detected.
8 . Source Output Connectors
The output terminals of the built-in dual-channel source of the oscilloscope.
When Source1 or Source2 is enabled, the signal currently set can be output through the [Source1] or [Source2] connector at the rear panel. This function is only available for MSO2000A-S and DS2000A-S models oscilloscopes.
1-12
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
Front Panel Function Overview
VERTICAL
CH1, CH2: analog input channels. The 2 channels are marked by different colors which are also used to mark both the corresponding waveforms on the screen and the channel input connectors. Press any key to open the corresponding channel menu and press again to turn off the channel.
MATH: press this key to open the math operation menu. You can perform addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, FFT, digital filter, logic operations and advanced operations.
REF: press this key to enable the reference waveform function to compare the waveform actually measured with the reference waveform.
VERTICAL POSITION: modify the vertical position of the current channel waveform. Turn clockwise to increase the position and turn counterclockwise to decrease. During the modification, the waveform would move up and down and the position message (e.g. ) at the lower-left corner of the screen would change accordingly. Press down this knob to quickly reset the vertical position to zero.
VERTICAL SCALE: modify the vertical scale of the current channel. Turn clockwise to decrease the scale and turn counterclockwise to increase. During the modification, the display amplitude of the waveform would enlarge or reduce but the actual amplitude remains unchanged. The scale information (e.g. ) at the lower side of the screen would change accordingly. Press down this knob to quickly switch the vertical scale adjustment modes between “Coarse” and “Fine”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
1-13 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
Decode1, Decode2: decoding function keys. Press the corresponding key to open the decoding function menu. MSO2000A/DS2000A support parallel decoding and protocol decodings.
HORIZONTAL
MENU: press this key to open the horizontal control menu under which you can turn on or off the delayed sweep function, switch between different time base modes, switch between “Coarse” and “Fine” adjustment of scale as well as modify the horizontal reference setting.
HORIZONTAL SCALE: modify the horizontal time base. Turn clockwise to reduce the time base and turn counterclockwise to increase. During the modification, waveforms of all the channels will be displayed in expanded or compressed mode and the time base message (e.g. ) at the upper side of the screen would change accordingly. Pressing down this knob can quickly turn on or off the delayed sweep function.
HORIZONTAL POSITION: modify the horizontal position. The trigger point would move left or right relative to the center of the screen when you turn the knob.
During the modification, waveforms of all the channels would move left or right and the trigger position message (e.g. ) at the upper-right corner of the screen would change accordingly. Pressing down this knob can quickly reset the trigger position (or the delayed sweep position).
1-14
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
TRIGGER
MODE: press this key to switch the trigger mode to
Auto, Normal or Single and the corresponding state backlight of the current trigger mode would be illuminated.
TRIGGER LEVEL: modify the trigger level. Turn clockwise to increase the level and turn counterclockwise to reduce. During the modification, the trigger level line would move up or down and the value in the trigger level message box (e.g. ) at the lower-left corner of the screen would change accordingly. Press down the knob to quickly reset the trigger level to zero point.
MENU: press this key to open the trigger operation menu. This oscilloscope provides various trigger types.
FORCE: in Normal and Single trigger modes, press this key to generate a trigger signal forcefully.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
1-15 [email protected]
RIGOL
CLEAR
RUN/STOP
Chapter 1 Quick Start
Press this key to clear all the waveforms on the screen. If the oscilloscope is in the “RUN” state, new waveforms will still be displayed.
Press this key to set the state of the oscilloscope to
“RUN” or “STOP”.
In the “RUN” state, the key is illuminated in yellow.
In the “STOP” state, the key is illuminated in red.
SINGLE
AUTO
Press this key to set the trigger mode to “Single” and this key is illuminated in orange. In single trigger mode, press
FORCE to generate a trigger signal immediately.
Press this key to enable the waveform auto setting function. The oscilloscope will automatically adjust the vertical scale, horizontal time base and trigger mode according to the input signal to realize optimum waveform display.
Note: The waveform auto setting function requires that the frequency of sine should be no lower than 25 Hz. If the parameter exceeds this limit, the waveform auto setting function might be invalid.
1-16
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
Multifunction Knob
Adjust waveform brightness:
In non-menu-operation mode (menu is hidden), turn this knob to adjust the brightness of waveform. The adjustable range is from 0% to 100%. Turn clockwise to increase the brightness and counterclockwise to reduce.
Press down this knob to reset the brightness to 50%.
You can also press Display WaveIntensity and use the knob to adjust the waveform brightness.
Multifunction (the backlight goes on during operation):
In menu operation, press any menu softkey and turn the knob to select the submenus under this menu and then press down the knob to select the current submenu. It can also be used to modify parameters and input filename. In addition, for MSO2000A-S and DS2000A-S models oscilloscopes, when setting the parameters (such as frequency, amplitude etc.) of the built-in signal source, press the corresponding menu softkey and then press the knob; the numeric keyboard will pop-up on the screen and you can select and input the desired value and unit using this knob.
Navigation Knob
This knob can quickly adjust the numerical parameters with relatively large settable range.
Turn clockwise (counterclockwise) to increase
(reduce) the value. The inner knob is used for fine adjustment and the outer knob for coarse adjustment.
For example, this knob can be used to quickly locate the waveform frame (the
Current Frame menu) to be played back in the waveform playback function.
Similar parameters include trigger holdoff, pulse width setting, slope time and etc.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
1-17 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
Function Keys
Measure: press this key to open the measurement setting menu. You can set the measurement setting, all measure, statistic function etc.
Press MENU at the left of the screen to open the measurement menus of 29 waveform parameters. Then, press down the corresponding menu softkey to quickly realize one-key measurement and the measurement result will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Acquire: press this key to enter the sample setting menu to set the acquisition mode, memory depth and anti-aliasing function of the oscilloscope.
Storage: press this key to enter the file store and recall interface. The storable file types include traces, waveforms, setups, picture and CSV. The picture can be stored in bmp, png, jpeg or tiff format. Internal and external storage as well as disk management are also supported.
Cursor: press this key to enter the cursor measurement menu. The oscilloscope provides four cursor modes: manual, track, auto and X-Y.
Note: X-Y cursor mode is only available when the horizontal time base is set to X-Y.
Display: press this key to enter the display setting menu to set the display type, persistence time, wave intensity, grid type, grid brightness and menu display time of the waveform.
Utility: press this key to enter the system utility function setting menu to set the system-related functions or parameters, such as the I/O, sound and language.
Besides, some advanced functions (such as the pass/fail test, waveform record and print setting) are also supported.
1-18
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
Signal Source
Press this key to enter the source setting interface. You can enable or disable the output of the [Source1] or [Source2] connector at the rear panel, set the output signal waveform and parameters, turn on or off the state display of the current signal source.
Note: This function is only available for MSO2000A-S and DS2000A-S models oscilloscopes.
Record
Stop Play/Pause Record
Record: press this key to start recording the waveform. The backlight is illuminated in red and flashes. Besides, when the record constant on (Open) is enabled, the backlight will also be illuminated in red and flashes.
Play/Pause: in the stop or pause state, press this key to play back the waveform and press again to pause the play. The backlight is illuminated in yellow.
Stop: press this key to stop the waveform being recorded or being played back. The backlight is illuminated in orange.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
1-19 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
Press this key to execute the print function or save the content displayed in the screen in the USB storage device in a picture file.
If a PictBridge printer is currently connected and the printer is in idle state, pressing this key will execute the print function. If no printer but a USB storage device is currently connected, pressing this key will save the screen content to the USB storage device in
“.png” format. You can also press Storage to set the storage type to picture and press Pic Type to store the screen image in the specified picture format (bmp, png, jpeg or tiff). When printer and
USB storage device are connected at the same time, the printer enjoys higher priority.
Logic Analyzer
Press this key to open the logic analyzer control menu. You can turn on or off any channel or channel group, modify the display size of the digital channel waveforms, modify the logic threshold of the digital channel as well as group the 16 digital channels and display them as a bus. You can also set a label for each digital channel.
Note: This function is only applicable to the MSO2000A and
MSO2000A-S series oscilloscopes.
1-20
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
User Interface
MSO2000A/DS2000A provides 8.0 inch, WVGA (800*480) 160,000 color TFT LCD.
What is worth mentioning is that the 14-grid ultra-wide screen enables you to view
“longer” waveform.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 1-12 User Interface
1.
Auto Measurement Items
Provide 16 horizontal (HORIZONTAL) parameters and 13 vertical (VERTICAL) parameters. Press the softkey at the left of the screen to enable the auto measurement function of the corresponding parameter. Press MENU continuously to switch between the horizontal and vertical parameters.
2.
Digital Channel Label and Waveform
The logic high level of the digital waveform is displayed in blue and the logic low
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
1-21 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start level in green (correspond to the color of the channel label). Its edge is displayed in white. The label and waveform of the digital channel currently selected are displayed in red.
Note: This function is only applicable to MSO2000A and MSO2000A-S models oscilloscopes.
3.
Status
Available states include RUN, STOP, T’D (triggered), WAIT and AUTO.
4.
Horizontal Time Base
Represent the time per grid on the horizontal axis on the screen.
Use HORIZONTAL SCALE to modify this parameter. The range available is from 1.000 ns/div to 1.000 ks/div (for 200 MHz bandwidth oscilloscope, the range available is 2.000 ns/div to 1.000 ks/div; for 100
MHz and 70 MHz bandwidth oscilloscope, the range available is 5.000 ns/div to 1.000 ks/div).
5.
Sample Rate/Memory Depth
Display the current real-time sample rate of the analog channels and memory depth of the oscilloscope.
The parameter changes with the horizontal time base.
6.
Waveform Memory
Provide the schematic diagram of the memory position of the waveform currently on the screen. waveform in the memory waveform on the screen
7.
Trigger Position
Display the trigger position of the waveform in the waveform memory and on the screen.
8.
Horizontal Position
Use HORIZONTAL POSITION to modify this parameter. Pressing down
1-22
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL the knob will automatically set the parameter to zero.
9.
Trigger Type
Display the currently selected trigger type and trigger condition setting.
Different labels are displayed when different trigger types are selected.
For example: represents triggering on the rising edge in “Edge” trigger.
10.
Trigger Source
Display the trigger source currently selected (CH1, CH2, EXT, AC Line or any channel of D0-D15). Different labels are displayed when different trigger sources are selected and the color of the trigger parameter area will change accordingly.
For example, denotes that CH1 is selected as the trigger source.
11.
Trigger Level
When the trigger source is set to CH1 or CH2, the trigger level label is displayed at the right of the screen and the trigger level value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen. When using TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the trigger level, the trigger level value will change with the up and down of .
When the trigger source is EXT, the trigger level value is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen. No trigger level label is displayed.
If the trigger source is AC line, no trigger level value and trigger level label are displayed.
When the trigger source is set to D0 to D15, the trigger level is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen. No trigger level label is displayed.
In Runt trigger, slope trigger and windows trigger, two trigger level labels
( and ) are displayed.
12.
CH1 Vertical Scale
Display the on/off status of CH1 and the voltage value per grid of CH1 waveform vertically. In addition, the following labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting: channel coupling (e.g. ), input impedance (e.g. ) and bandwidth limit (e.g. ). You can use VIRTICAL SCALE to modify this parameter.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
1-23 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start
13.
Analog Channel Label/Waveform
Different channels are marked with different colors and the colors of the channel label and waveform are the same.
14.
CH2 Vertical Scale
Display the on/off status of CH2 and the voltage value per grid of CH2 waveform vertically. In addition, the following labels will be displayed according to the current channel setting: channel coupling (e.g. ), input impedance (e.g. ) and bandwidth limit (e.g. ). You can use VIRTICAL SCALE to modify this parameter.
15.
Digital Channel Status Area
Display the current status of the 16 digital channels (D0 to D15 from right to left). The digital channels currently turned on are displayed in green, the digital channel currently selected is displayed in red and the digital channels currently turned off are displayed in grey.
Note: This function is only applicable to MSO2000A and MSO2000A-S models oscilloscopes.
16.
Message Box
Display the prompt messages.
17.
Source1 Waveform
Display the type of the waveform currently selected by Source1.
When the impedance of the signal source is set to 50 Ω, will be displayed at the right of the Source1 waveform.
When the modulation is enabled, will be displayed at the right of the
Source1 waveform.
Note: This function is only applicable to MSO2000A-S and DS2000A-S models oscilloscopes.
18.
Source2 Waveform
Display the type of the waveform currently selected by Source2.
When the impedance of the signal source is set to 50 Ω, will be displayed at the right of the Source2 waveform.
When the modulation is enabled, will be displayed at the right of the
Source2 waveform.
1-24
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
Note: This function is only applicable to MSO2000A-S and DS2000A-S models oscilloscopes.
19.
Notification Area
Display the system time, sound icon, USB storage device icon and PictBridge printer icon.
System Time
Displayed in “hh:mm (hour:minute)” format. When printing or storing the waveform, the output file will contain this time message. Press
Utility System System Time System Time to set through the following format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss (year-month-date hour:minute:second)
Sound Icon
When the sound is enabled, will be displayed. Press Utility Sound to enable or disable the sound.
USB Storage Device Icon
When a USB storage device is detected,
PictBridge Printer Icon
will be displayed.
When a PictBridge printer is correctly connected to the oscilloscope, will be displayed in this area.
20.
Operation MENU
Press any softkey to activate the corresponding menu. The following symbols might be displayed in the menu.
Denote that at the front panel can be rotated to select the parameter items. The backlight of turns on when the parameter selection is valid.
Denote that can be rotated to modify the parameter values. The backlight of turns on when the parameter input is valid.
Denote that can be rotated to modify the parameter values and press to input the desired paramrter values directly using the pop-up numeric keyboard. The backlight of turns on when the parameter input is valid.
Denote that you can rotate the “Navigation Knob” to quickly adjust/locate parameters.
Denote that you can rotate to adjust the parameter and then press down to select the parameter. The backlight of is
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
1-25 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 1 Quick Start constant on.
Denote that the current menu has several options.
Denote that the current menu has a submenu.
Press this key to return to the previous menu.
Note: The following direction keys might appear in the grid at the lower-left corner of the menu bar:
Denote that you can open the next page of the menu.
Denote that you can open the previous page of the menu.
To Use the Security Lock
If needed, you can use the security lock (please buy it yourself) to lock the oscilloscope to a fixed location. The method is as follows, align the lock with the lock hole and plug it into the lock hole vertically; turn the key clockwise to lock the oscilloscope and then pull the key out.
Security Lock Hole
Figure 1-13 To Use the Security Lock
Note: Please do not insert other articles into the security lock hole to avoid damaging the instrument.
1-26
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 1 Quick Start RIGOL
To Use the Built-in Help System
The help system of this oscilloscope provides instructions for all the keys and menu softkeys at the front panel. Press Help to open the help interface and press again to close the interface. The help interface mainly consists of two parts. The left is “Help
Options” and you can use “Button” or “Index” mode to select the desired help option.
The right is “Help Display Area” which displays the corresponding help information.
Help Options Help Display Area
Figure 1-14 Help Interface
Button:
Default mode. In this mode, you can press the button (except the power key and the key / at the right of the screen) or rotate at the front panel to select the button name (the item currently selected is displayed with brown shading) to get the corresponding help information in the “Help Display Area”. Besides, you can acquire the help information of the navigation knob by directly rotating the navigation knob or using to select “WaveSearch”. Use to select “To Index” and then press the knob to switch to Index mode.
Index:
In this mode, use to select the item that needs to get help (for example, “BW”).
The item currently selected is displayed with brown shading. Press the knob to get the corresponding help information in the “Help Display Area”.
Use to select “To Button” and then press the knob to switch to Button mode.
1-27 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
The contents of this chapter:
To Enable the Analog Channel
Channel Coupling
Bandwidth Limit
Probe Ratio
Input Impedance
Waveform Invert
Vertical Scale
Vertical Expansion
Amplitude Unit
Channel Label
Delay Calibration of the Analog Channel
RIGOL
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
To Enable the Analog Channel
MSO2000A/DS2000A provides 2 analog input channels (CH1 and CH2) and provides independent vertical control system for each channel. As the setting methods of the vertical systems of the two channels are the same, this chapter takes CH1 as an example to illustrate the setting method of the vertical system.
Connect a signal to the input connector of CH1 and then press CH1 in the vertical control area (VERTICAL) at the front panel to enable CH1.
At this point, the channel setting menu is displayed at the right side of the screen and the channel status label at the bottom of the screen (as shown in the figure below) is highlighted. The information displayed in the channel status label is related to the current channel setting.
After the channel is turned on, modify the parameters such as the vertical scale, horizontal time base and trigger mode according to the input signal to make the waveform display easy to be observed and measured.
2-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
Channel Coupling
The undesired signals can be filtered out by setting the coupling mode. For example, the signal under test is a square waveform with DC offset.
When the coupling mode is “DC”: the DC and AC components can pass the channel.
When the coupling mode is “AC”: the DC components of the signal under test are blocked.
When the coupling mode is “GND”: the DC and AC components of the signal under test are both blocked.
Press CH1 Coupling and use to select the desired coupling mode (the default is DC). The current coupling mode is displayed in the channel status label at the bottom of the screen as shown in the figures below. You can also press
Coupling continuously to switch the coupling mode.
DC AC GND
Bandwidth Limit
Setting the bandwidth limit can reduce the display noise. For example, the signal under test is a pulse with high frequency oscillation.
When bandwidth limit is disabled, the high frequency components of the signal under test can pass the channel.
Enable bandwidth limit and limit the bandwidth to 20 MHz or 100 MHz [1] , the high frequency components that exceed 20 MHz or 100 MHz are attenuated.
Press CH1 BW Limit and use to enable or disable bandwidth limit (the default is OFF). When bandwidth limit (20 MHz or 100 MHz) is enabled, the character
“B” will be displayed in the channel status label at the bottom of the screen. You can also press BW Limit continuously to switch the bandwidth limit status.
Note [1] : Only the oscilloscope which analog bandwidth is 200 MHz or 300 MHz can limit the bandwidth to 100 MHz.
2-3 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
Probe Ratio
You can set the probe attenuation ratio manually. The probe ratio values available are as shown in the table below.
0.01X
0.02X
0.05X
0.1X
0.2X
0.5X
1X
2X
5X
10X
20X
50X
100X
200X
500X
1000X
Table 2-1 Probe Attenuation Coefficient
Menu
Attenuation Coefficient
(waveform display amplitude : actual waveform amplitude)
0.01:1
0.02:1
0.05:1
0.1:1
0.2:1
0.5:1
1:1
2:1
5:1
10:1
20:1
50:1
100:1
200:1
500:1
1000:1
2-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
Input Impedance
This oscilloscope provides two input impedance modes (1 MΩ (default) and 50 Ω) to reduce the circuit load caused by the interaction of the oscilloscope and the circuit to be tested.
1MΩ: the input impedance of the oscilloscope is rather high and the current flowing into the oscilloscope from the circuit under test can be ignored.
50Ω: match the oscilloscope with a device with 50 Ω output impedance.
Press CH1 Input to set the input impedance of the oscilloscope. When “50Ω” is selected, “Ω” is displayed in the channel status label at the bottom of the screen.
Note: The setting of the input impedance affects the settable range of the vertical scale and vertical offset of the corresponding channel. For the details, please refer to
“Specifications”.
Waveform Invert
Press CH1 Invert to turn waveform invert on or off. When waveform invert is turned off, the waveform display is normal; when waveform invert is turned on, the waveform voltage values are inverted (as shown in the figures below).
(a) “Invert” is Off (b) “Invert” is On
Figure 2-1 Waveform Invert
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
Vertical Scale
Vertical scale refers to the voltage value per grid in the vertical direction on the screen and is usually expressed as V/div.
Press CH1 Volts/Div to select the desired adjustment mode of the vertical scale, or press VERTICAL SCALE to switch the adjustment mode quickly.
Coarse adjustment: set the vertical scale in 1-2-5 step namely 500 μV/div, 1 mV/div, 2 mV/div, 5 mV/div, 10 mV/div…10 V/div (take counterclockwise as an example).
Fine adjustment: further adjust the vertical scale at a relatively smaller step to improve the vertical resolution. If the amplitude of the input waveform is a little bit greater than the full scale under the current scale and the amplitude would be a little bit lower if the next scale is used, fine adjustment can be used to improve the amplitude of waveform display to view signal details.
After the adjustment mode is selected, rotate VERTICAL SCALE to adjust the vertical scale (clockwise to reduce the scale and counterclockwise to increase). The scale information in the channel status label (as shown in the figure below) at the bottom of the screen will change accordingly during the adjustment. The adjustable range of the vertical scale is related to the probe ratio and input impedance currently set. By default, the probe ratio is 1X, the input impedance is 1 MΩ and the adjustable range of the vertical scale is from 500 μV/div to 10 V/div.
When adjusting the vertical scale, the waveform will be expanded or compressed around the center of the screen or the ground level of the signal according to the change of the vertical scale.
2-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
Vertical Expansion
When using VERTICAL SCALE to change the vertical scale of the analog channel, you can choose to expand or compress the signal vertically around the center of the screen or the ground point of the signal.
Press Utility System VerticalExp to select “Center” or “Ground” and the default is “Ground”.
Center: when the vertical scale is modified, the waveform will be expanded or compressed around the center of the screen.
Ground: when the vertical scale is modified, the waveform will be expanded or compressed around the ground level.
Amplitude Unit
Select the amplitude unit for the current channel. The available units are W, A, V and
U. When the unit is changed, the unit displayed in the channel status label will change accordingly. Press CH1 Unit to select the desired unit and the default is V.
Channel Label
The instrument uses the number of the channel ( ) to mark the corresponding channel by default. For ease of use, you can also set a label for each channel, for example, .
Note: The user-defined label can include uppercase English letters (from A to Z), lowercase English letters (from a to z), numbers (from 0 to 9), underline and space; the length of the label cannot exceed 4 characters.
For example, change “ ” to “ ”. Press CH1 Label to enter the label modification interface. Press Keyboard to select the “Keyboard” area. Select “ A a” using and press down to switch it to “ a A”. Select “C” using and press down to input the character. Use the same method to input “hn1”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
Name Input Area Keyboard Upper/Lower Case Switch
Figure 2-2 Label Modification Interface
After finishing the input, press OK to finish the modification and the channel label will change to “ ”.
To modify or delete the input character, press Name to select the “Name Input Area” and use to select the character to be modified or deleted. Enter the desired character to modify the character or press Delete to delete the character selected.
2-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System RIGOL
Delay Calibration of the Analog Channel
When using an oscilloscope for actual measurement, the transmission delay of the probe cable may bring relatively greater error (zero offset). Zero offset is defined as the offset of the crossing point of the waveform and trigger level line relative to the trigger position, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 2-3 Zero Offset
For MSO2000A/DS2000A, users can set a delay time to calibrate the zero offset of the corresponding channel. Press CH1 Delay-Cal and use to set the desired delay time. The range available is from -200 ns to 200 ns. Pressing down can restore the delay time to 0.00 s.
Note: This parameter is related to the instrument model and the current horizontal time base setting. The larger the horizontal time base is, the larger the scale will be and the larger the setting step will be.
Take MSO2302A as an example, when the horizontal time base is 50 ns, the step is 1 ns; when the horizontal time base is 2 μs, the step is 40 ns; when the horizontal time base is greater than or equal to 10 μs, the delay calibration time cannot be adjusted.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
The contents of this chapter:
Delayed Sweep
Time Base Mode
Horizontal Scale
Horizontal Reference
RIGOL
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
Delayed Sweep
Delayed sweep can be used to enlarge a length of waveform horizontally to view the waveform details.
Press MENU in the horizontal control area (HORIZONTAL) at the front panel and press Delayed to enable or disable delayed sweep. In delayed sweep mode, the screen is divided into two display areas as shown in the figure below.
Note: To enable delayed sweep, the current time base mode must be “Y-T” and the
“Pass/Fail test” must be disabled.
The Waveform before
Enlargement
Main
Time Base
Delayed
Sweep
Time Base
The Waveform after Enlargement
Figure 3-1 Delayed Sweep
The Waveform before Enlargement:
The waveform in the area that has not been covered by the subtransparent blue in the upper part of the screen is the waveform before enlargement. You can turn
HORIZONTAL POSITION to move the area left and right or turn
HORIZONTAL SCALE to enlarge or reduce this area.
3-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System RIGOL
The Waveform after Enlargement:
The waveform in the lower part of the screen is the horizontally expanded waveform.
Compared to the main time base, the delayed time base has increased the waveform resolution (as shown in the figure above).
Note: The delayed time base should be less than or equal to the main time base and can be modified by rotating HORIZONTAL SCALE.
Tip
You can also press down HORIZONTAL SCALE (delayed sweep shortcut key) to quickly switch to delayed sweep mode.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
Time Base Mode
Press MENU in the horizontal control area (HORIZONTAL) at the front panel and then press Time Base to select the time base mode of the oscilloscope and the default is Y-T.
Y-T Mode
In this mode, the Y axis represents voltage and the X axis represents time.
Note: Only when this mode is enabled can “Delayed Sweep” be turned on. In this mode, when the horizontal time base is greater than or equal to 200 ms, the instrument enters slow sweep mode. For the details, please refer to the introduction of slow sweep in “Roll Mode”.
X-Y Mode
In this mode, the oscilloscope changes the two channels from voltage-time display mode to voltage-voltage display mode. Wherein, the X axis and Y axis tracks the voltages of CH1 and CH2 respectively. The phase deviation between two signals with the same frequency can be easily measured via Lissajous method. The figure below shows the measurement schematic diagram of the phase deviation.
The signal must be centered horizontally
II I
D
C
A B
Figure 3-2 Measurement Schematic Diagram of Phase Deviation
3-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System RIGOL
According to sin θ =A/B or C/D (wherein, θ is the phase deviation angle between the two channels and the definitions of A, B, C and D are as shown in the figure above), the phase deviation angle is obtained, that is:
θ = ± arcsin (A/B) or ± arcsin (C/D)
If the principal axis of the ellipse is within quadrant I and III, the phase deviation angle obtained should be within quadrant I and IV, namely within (0 to π /2) or (3 π /2 to 2 π ).
If the principal axis of the ellipse is within quadrant II and IV, the phase deviation angle obtained should be within quadrant II and III, namely within
(
π /2 to
π) or (π to 3 π /2).
X-Y function can be used to measure the phase deviation occurred when the signal under test passes through a circuit network. Connect the oscilloscope to the circuit to monitor the input and output signals of the circuit.
Application example: measure the phase deviation of the input signals of two channels.
Method 1: Use Lissajous method
1.
Connect a sine signal to CH1 and then connect a sine signal with the same frequency and amplitude but a 90° phase deviation to CH2.
2.
Press AUTO and enable X-Y mode. Rotate HORIZONTAL SCALE to adjust the sample rate properly to get better Lissajous figure for better observation and measurement.
3.
Rotate VERTICAL POSITION of CH1 and CH2 to display the signals at the center of the screen and rotate VERTICAL SCALE of CH1 and CH2 to make the signals easy to observe. At this point, the circle as shown in the figure below should be displayed.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
4.
Observe the measurement result shown in the figure above. According to the measurement schematic diagram of the phase deviation (as shown in Figure
3-2), A/B (C/D) = 1. Thus, the phase deviation angle θ = ± arcsin1=90°.
Note:
The maximum sample rate of X-Y mode is 1.0 GSa/s. Generally, longer sample waveform can ensure better display effect of Lissajous figure. But due to the limitation of the memory depth, you have to reduce the waveform sample rate to acquire longer waveform (refer to the introduction in “Memory Depth”).
Therefore, during the measurement, reducing the sample rate properly can acquire better display effect of Lissajous figure.
When X-Y mode is enabled, “Delayed Sweep” will be disabled automatically.
The following functions are not available in X-Y mode:
“Auto Measurement”, “Math Operation”, “Reference Waveform”,
“Delayed Sweep”, “Vectors”, “horizontal position”, “To Trigger the
Oscilloscope”, “Protocol Decoding”, “Acquisition Mode”, “Pass/Fail
Test”, “Waveform Record” and “Digital Channel”.
Method 2: Use the shortcut measurement function
Please measure the phase deviation between the input waveforms of CH1 and CH2 by referring to the phase deviation measurement function in “Delay and Phase”.
3-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System RIGOL
Roll Mode
In this mode, the waveform scrolls from the right to the left to update the display.
The range of horizontal scale adjustment is from 200.0 ms/div to 1.000 ks/div.
Note: When Roll mode is enabled, the waveform “horizontal position”, “Delayed
Sweep”, “Protocol Decoding”, “Pass/Fail Test”, “Measurement Range”,
“Waveform Record”, “To Set the Persistence Time” and “To Trigger the
Oscilloscope” are not available.
Slow Sweep
Slow sweep is another mode similar to Roll mode. In Y-T mode, when the horizontal time base is set to 200 ms or slower, the instrument enters “slow sweep” mode in which the instrument first acquires the data at the left of the trigger point and then waits for trigger event. After the trigger occurs, the instrument continues to finish the waveform at the right of the trigger point. When slow sweep mode is used to observe low frequency signal, it is recommended that the “Channel Coupling” is set to “DC”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
Horizontal Scale
Horizontal scale, namely horizontal time base, refers to the time per grid in the horizontal direction on the screen and is usually expressed as s/div.
Being similar to “Vertical Scale”, the horizontal scale can be adjusted in “Coarse” or
“Fine” mode. Press MENU ScaleAdjust in the horizontal control area
(HORIZONTAL) at the front panel to select the desired mode.
Coarse: set the horizontal scale in 1-2-5 step namely 1 ns/div, 2 ns/div, 5 ns/div,
10 ns/div……1.000 ks/div (taking adjusting MSO2302A counterclockwise as an example).
Fine: further adjust the horizontal scale at a relatively smaller step.
After the adjustment mode is selected, turn HORIZONTAL SCALE to adjust the horizontal scale. Turn clockwise to reduce the horizontal scale and turn counterclockwise to increase. The scale information at the upper left corner of the screen will change accordingly during the adjustment. The range of horizontal scale adjustment is related to the model of the oscilloscope as shown in the figure below.
Table 3-1 Range of Horizontal Scale
Models
MSO2302A/MSO2302A-S/DS2302A/DS2302A-S
MSO2202A/MSO2202A-S/DS2202A/DS2202A-S
MSO2102A/MSO2102A-S/DS2102A/DS2102A-S
Range of Horizontal Scale
1.000 ns/div to 1.000 ks/div
2.000 ns/div to 1.000 ks/div
5.000 ns/div to 1.000 ks/div
MSO2072A/MSO2072A-S/DS2072A/DS2072A-S 5.000 ns/div to 1.000 ks/div
When adjusting the horizontal scale, the waveform will be expanded or compressed around the center of the screen, the trigger position or the user-defined position according to the change of the horizontal scale.
3-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System RIGOL
Horizontal Reference
Horizontal reference is the reference position according to which the screen waveform is expanded or compressed horizontally when adjusting HORIZONTAL
SCALE. In Y-T mode and the delayed sweep is disabled, press MENU HorRef in the horizontal control area (HORIZONTAL) at the front panel to select the desired reference mode and the default is “Center”.
Note: This function is not available in X-Y mode and Roll mode as well as in Y-T mode when the delayed sweep is enabled.
1.
Center
When changing the horizontal time base, the waveform is expanded or compressed horizontally around the center of the screen.
2.
Trig Pos
When changing the horizontal time base, the waveform is expanded or compressed horizontally around the trigger point.
3.
User
When changing the horizontal time base, the waveform is expanded or compressed horizontally around the user-defined reference position.
After this mode is selected, press RefPos and rotate to set the user-defined reference position. The range is from -350 (the rightmost of the screen) to 350
(the leftmost of the screen) and the default is 0 (the center of the screen). Press
down to restore the reference position to 0.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
The contents of this chapter:
Acquisition Mode
Sample Mode
Sample Rate
LA Sample Rate
LA Memory Depth
Memory Depth
Anti-Aliasing
RIGOL
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
Acquisition Mode
The acquisition mode is used to control how to generate waveform points from sample points.
Press Acquire Acquisition and use to select the desired acquisition mode
(the default is “Normal”), then press down the knob to select this mode. You can also press Acquisition continuously to switch the acquisition mode.
Normal
In this mode, the oscilloscope samples the signal at equal time interval to rebuild the waveform. For most of the waveforms, the best display effect can be obtained using this mode.
Average
In this mode, the oscilloscope averages the waveforms from multiple samples to reduce the random noise of the input signal and improve the vertical resolution. The greater the number of averages is, the lower the noise will be and the higher the vertical resolution will be but the slower the response of the displayed waveform to the waveform changes will be.
When “Average” mode is selected, press Averages and use to set the desired number of averages. The numbers of averages available include 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,
128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096 and 8192. The default is 2.
4-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
Figure 4-1 The Waveform before Average
Figure 4-2 The Waveform after 256 Averages
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
Peak Detect
In this mode, the oscilloscope acquires the maximum and minimum values of the signal within the sample interval to get the envelope of the signal or the narrow pulse of the signal that might be lost. In this mode, signal confusion can be prevented, but the noise displayed would be larger.
High Resolution
This mode uses a kind of ultra-sample technique to average the neighboring points of the sample waveform to reduce the random noise on the input signal and generate much smoother waveforms on the screen. This is generally used when the sample rate of the digital converter is higher than the storage rate of the acquisition memory.
Note: “Average” and “High Res” modes use different averaging methods. The former uses “Multi-sample Average” and the latter uses “Single Sample Average”.
4-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
Sample Mode
This oscilloscope only supports real-time sample. In this mode, the oscilloscope samples and displays waveform within a trigger event. The maximum real-time sample rate of the analog channels of MSO2000A/DS2000A is 2 GSa/s and the current sample rate is displayed under the Sa Rate menu.
Tip
Press RUN/STOP to stop the sample, the oscilloscope will hold the last display. At this point, you can still use the vertical control and horizontal control to pan and zoom the waveform.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
Sample Rate
Sample refers to the process that the oscilloscope converts analog signals to digital signals at certain time interval and stores the signals in sequence. The sample rate is the reciprocal of the time interval. The maximum real-time sample rate of the analog channels of MSO2000A/DS2000A is 2 GSa/s.
Note: The sample rate is displayed in the status bar at the upper side of the screen and in the Sa Rate menu and can be changed indirectly by adjusting the horizontal time base through HORIZONTAL SCALE or modifying the “Memory Depth”.
The influence on the waveform when the sample rate is too low:
1.
Waveform Distortion: when the sample rate is too low, some waveform details are lost and the waveform displayed is rather different from the actual signal.
2.
Waveform Confusion: when the sample rate is lower than twice the actual signal frequency (Nyquist Frequency), the frequency of the waveform rebuilt from the sample data is lower than the actual signal frequency.
4-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
3.
Waveform Leakage: when the sample rate is too low, the waveform rebuilt from the sample data does not reflect all the actual signal information.
Pulse disappeared
LA Sample Rate
LA sampling refers to the process that the oscilloscope samples the compared digital signal at a certain time interval. LA sample rate is the reciprocal of the time interval.
For example, the oscilloscope with 500 MSa/s LA sample rate samples digital signals once every 2 ns. The maximum sample rate of the digital channels of the oscilloscope is 1 GSa/s.
Note:
1.
The digital signal mentioned here refers to the signal generated by comparing the input signal to the threshold specified by users. The comparison rule is that the input signal is judged as logic high level when it is greater than the threshold and logic low level when it is lower than the threshold.
2.
The LA sample rate is displayed in the LASaRate menu and can be changed indirectly by adjusting the horizontal time base (s/div) through HORIZONTAL
SCALE or modifying the “Memory Depth”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
Memory Depth
Memory depth refers to the number of waveform points that the oscilloscope can store in a single trigger sample and it reflects the storage ability of the sample memory. MSO2000A/DS2000A provides 14 Mpts standard memory depth and up to
56 Mpts memory depth (option).
Trigger Point
T
Pre-sample Delayed Sample
Memory Depth
Figure 4-3 Memory Depth
The relation of memory depth, sample rate and waveform length fulfills the equation below:
Memory depth = Sample Rate (Sa/s) × Horizontal Time Base × Number of Grids
Horizontally
Wherein, for MSO2000A/DS2000A, the number of grids horizontally is fixed at 14.
Therefore, under the same time base, higher memory depth can ensure higher sample rate.
Press Acquire Mem Depth, use to switch to the desired memory depth (the default is auto) and then press down the knob to select the option. You can also press Mem Depth continuously to switch the memory depth.
When a single channel is enabled, the memory depths available include Auto,
14kPoints, 140kPoints, 1.4MPoints, 14MPoints and 56MPoints (option).
When CH1 and CH2 are enabled, the memory depths available include Auto,
7kPoints, 70kPoints, 700kPoints, 7MPoints and 28MPoints (option).
4-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System RIGOL
In “Auto” mode, the oscilloscope selects the memory depth automatically according to the current sample rate. At this point, you can adjust the memory depth indirectly by rotating HORIZONTAL SCALE to adjust the sample rate.
LA Memory Depth
Press Acquire, you can view the current memory depth of the digital channel in LA
Mem Depth. The LA Memory Depth will change with the memory depth of the analog channel and cannot be set separately.
Anti-Aliasing
At slower sweep speed, the sample rate is reduced and a dedicated display algorithm is used to minimize the possibility of aliasing.
Press Acquire Anti-Aliasing to enable or disable the anti-aliasing function. By default, anti-aliasing is disabled.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
As for trigger, you set certain trigger condition according to the requirement and when a waveform in the waveform stream meets this condition, the oscilloscope captures this waveform as well as the neighbouring part and displays them on the screen. For digital oscilloscope, it displays waveform continuously no matter whether it is stably triggered, but only stable trigger can ensures stable display. The trigger module guarantees that each time base sweep or sample starts when the input signal meets the trigger condition defined by users; namely each sweep and sample are synchronous and the waveforms acquired overlap to display a stable waveform.
Trigger setting should be based on the features of the input signal, thus you need to have some knowledge of the signal under test to quickly capture the desired waveform. This oscilloscope provides abundant advanced trigger types which can help you to focus on the desired waveform details.
The contents of this chapter:
Trigger Source
Trigger Mode
Trigger Coupling
Trigger Holdoff
Noise Rejection
Trigger Type
Trigger Output Connector
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Trigger Source
Press MENU Source in the trigger control area (TRIGGER) at the front panel to select the desired trigger source. Signals input from CH1/CH2, the [EXT TRIG] connector or [LOGIC D0-D15] connector as well as the AC Line can all be used as trigger source.
Analog channel input:
Signals input from analog channels CH1 and CH2 can all be used as the trigger source. No matter whether the channel selected is enabled, the channel can work normally.
Digital channel input:
Signal input from any digital channel of D0-D15 can all be used as the trigger source.
No matter whether the channel selected is enabled, the channel can work normally.
External trigger input:
Signals (such as external clock and signal of the circuit to be tested) input from the
[EXT TRIG] connector can be used as the trigger source. When this type of trigger source is selected, you can set the trigger level within -4 V to +4 V by rotating
TRIGGER LEVEL.
External trigger source can be used to connect external trigger signal to the [EXT
TRIG] channel when both of the two channels are sampling data.
AC line:
The trigger signal is obtained from the AC power input of the oscilloscope. AC trigger is usually used to measure signals relevant to the AC power frequency. For example, stably trigger the waveform output from the transformer of a transformer substation; it is mainly used in related measurements of the power industry.
5-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Trigger Mode
The following is the schematic diagram of the acquisition memory. To easily understand the trigger event, the acquisition memory is divided into the pre-trigger buffer and post-trigger buffer.
Trigger Event
Pre-trigger Buffer P ost-trigger Buffer
Acquisition memory
Figure 5-1 Schematic Diagram of the Acquisition Memory
After the system runs, the oscilloscope operates by first filling the pre-trigger buffer.
It starts searching for a trigger after the pre-trigger buffer is filled. While searching for the trigger, the data sampled will still be transmitted to the pre-trigger buffer (the new data will continuously overwrite the previous date). When a trigger is found, the pre-trigger buffer contains the data acquired just before the trigger. Then, the oscilloscope will fill the post-trigger buffer and display the data in the acquisition memory. If the acquisition is activated via RUN/STOP, the oscilloscope will repeat this process; if the acquisition is activated via SINGLE, the oscilloscope will stop after finishing a single acquisition (you can pan and zoom the waveform currently displayed).
Press MODE in the trigger control area (TRIGGER) at the front panel or press
MENU Sweep to select the desired trigger mode. The corresponding status light of the mode currently selected turns on.
Auto:
In this trigger mode, the oscilloscope will trigger, sample and display waveform forcibly if no specified trigger condition is found.
This trigger mode should be used when the signal level is unknown or the DC should be displayed as well as when forcible trigger is not necessary as the trigger condition always occurs.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Normal:
In this trigger mode, the oscilloscope triggers and samples data only when the specified trigger condition is found.
This trigger mode should be used when the signal is with low repetition rate or only the event specified by the trigger setting needs to be sampled as well as when auto trigger should be prevented to acquire stable display.
Single:
In this trigger mode, the oscilloscope performs a single trigger and acquisition when the specified trigger condition is found and then stops.
This trigger mode should be used when you need to perform a single acquisition of the specified event and analyze the acquisition result (you can pan and zoom the waveform currently displayed and the subsequent waveform data will not overwrite the current waveform).
Note: In Normal and Single trigger modes, pressing FORCE can force a trigger.
5-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Trigger Coupling
Trigger coupling decides which kind of components will be transmitted to the trigger module. Please distinguish it with “Channel Coupling”.
DC: allow DC and AC components into the trigger path.
AC: block all the DC components and attenuate signals lower than 75 Hz.
LF Reject: block the DC components and reject the low frequency components
(lower than 75 kHz).
HF Reject: reject the high frequency components (higher than 75 kHz).
Press MENU Setting Coupling in the trigger control area (TRIGGER) at the front panel to select the desired coupling type (the default is DC).
Note: Trigger coupling is only valid in edge trigger and when the trigger source is
CH1 or CH2.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Trigger Holdoff
Trigger holdoff can be used to stably trigger the complex waveforms. Holdoff time is the amount of time that the oscilloscope waits before re-arming the trigger module.
The oscilloscope will not trigger even if the trigger condition is met during the holdoff time and will only re-arm the trigger module after the holdoff time expires. For example, to stably trigger the repeat pulse series as shown in the figure below, the holdoff time should be set to a value greater than T1 and lower than T2.
Holdoff Time
Trigger Positions
T1
T2
Figure 5-2 Schematic Diagram of Trigger Holdoff
Press MENU (in the trigger control area (TRIGGER) at the front panel) Setting
Holdoff; then, turn or the inner knob of the navigation knob to modify the holdoff time at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the holdoff time (the default is 100 ns) at a relatively larger step until the trigger becomes stable. The adjustable range is from 100 ns to 10 s.
Note: For MSO2000A/DS2000A, the trigger types that support trigger holdoff include edge trigger, pulse trigger, runt trigger, windows trigger, slope trigger, pattern trigger, delay trigger and duration trigger.
5-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Noise Rejection
Noise rejection can reject the high frequency noise in the signal and reduce the possibility of miss-trigger of the oscilloscope.
Press MENU Setting Noise Reject in the trigger control area (TRIGGER) at the front panel to enable or disable noise rejection.
Note: When the trigger source is any of D0 to D15, Noise Reject is grayed out and disabled.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Trigger Type
MSO2000A/DS2000A provides various trigger types, including various serial bus triggers. You can press MENU (in the trigger control area (TRIGGER) at the front panel) Type to select the desired trigger type.
Edge Trigger
Pulse Trigger
Runt Trigger
Windows Trigger (Option)
Nth Edge Trigger (Option)
Slope Trigger
Video Trigger (HDTV Option)
Pattern Trigger
Delay Trigger (Option)
TimeOut Trigger (Option)
Duration Trigger (Option)
Setup/Hold Trigger
RS232 Trigger
I2C Trigger
SPI Trigger
USB Trigger (Option)
CAN Trigger (Option)
5-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Edge Trigger
Trigger on the trigger threshold of the specified edge of the input signal.
Trigger Type:
Press Type, rotate to select “Edge” and press down . At this point, the trigger setting information is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example,
. The trigger type is edge trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is 170 mV.
Source Selection:
Press Source and select CH1, CH2, EXT, AC Line or any channel of D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press Slope to select the kind of edge of the input signal on which the oscilloscope triggers. The current edge type is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
: trigger on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
: trigger on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
: trigger on the rising or falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep and select “Auto”, “Normal” or “Single”. For the details, please refer to
“Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (trigger coupling, trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Trigger coupling is only available when the trigger source is CH1 or CH2.
When the trigger source is any of D0 to D15, Noise Reject is grayed out and disabled.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Trigger Level:
Trigger occurs only when the signal reaches the preset trigger level. Use TRIGGER
LEVEL to modify the level. If the current trigger source is a digital channel, the trigger level value will be displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. If the current trigger source is an analog channel, an orange trigger level line and the trigger mark “ ” appear on the screen and move up or down with the rotation of the knob, while at the same time, the trigger level value (such as ) at the lower left corner of the screen also changes accordingly. When stopping turning the knob, the trigger level line and the trigger mark disappear in about 2 s.
5-10
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Pulse Trigger
In pulse trigger mode, the oscilloscope will trigger when the pulse width of the input signal satisfies the specified pulse width condition.
Trigger Type:
Press Type, rotate to select “Pulse” and press down . At this point, the trigger setting information is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example,
. The trigger type is pulse trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is 0.00 V.
Source Selection:
Press Source and select CH1, CH2, EXT or any channel of D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Pulse Condition:
In this oscilloscope, positive pulse width is defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of the trigger level and positive pulse; negative pulse width is defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of the trigger level and negative pulse, as shown in the figure below.
A B
Trigger level
Positive pulse width
Negitive pulse width
A B
Trigger level
Figure 5-3 Positive Pulse Width/Negative Pulse Width
Press When to select the desired pulse condition.
: trigger when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater than
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-11 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
the specified pulse width.
: trigger when the positive pulse width of the input signal is lower than the specified pulse width.
: trigger when the positive pulse width of the input signal is greater than the specified lower limit of pulse width and lower than the upper limit of pulse width.
: trigger when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater than the specified pulse width.
: trigger when the negative pulse width of the input signal is lower than the specified pulse width.
: trigger when the negative pulse width of the input signal is greater than the specified lower limit of pulse width and lower than the upper limit of pulse width.
Pulse Width Setting:
When the Pulse Condition is set to , , or , press Setting and turn or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the pulse width at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the pulse width at a relatively larger step. The range available is from 2 ns to 4 s.
When the Pulse Condition is set to or , press Upper Limit and Lower Limit respectively and adjust the upper limit and lower limit of pulse width using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above. The range of the upper limit is from 10 ns to 4 s.
The range of the lower limit is from 2 ns to 3.99 s.
Note: The lower limit of the pulse width must be lower than the upper limit.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep and select “Auto”, “Normal” or “Single”. For the details, please refer to
“Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection is grayed out and disabled automatically when the source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
5-12
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Trigger Level:
Use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the level. For the details, please refer to the introduction of “ Trigger Level”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-13 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Runt Trigger
Runt trigger is used to trigger pulses that pass one trigger level but fail to pass the other one.
For this oscilloscope, positive runt pulses are defined as pulses that pass the lower limit of the trigger level but fail to pass the upper limit of the trigger level; negative runt pulses are defined as pulses that pass the upper limit of the trigger level but fail to pass the lower limit of the trigger level, as shown in the figure below.
Upper Limit of the
Trigger Level
Lower Limit of the
Trigger Level
Positive Runt Pulse
Negative Runt Pulse
Figure 5-4 Runt Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, rotate to select “Runt” and press down . At this point, the trigger setting information is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example,
. The trigger type is runt trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the difference between the upper limit of trigger level and the lower limit of trigger level is 3.06 V.
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the signal source list between CH1 and CH2. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Pulse Polarity:
Press Polarity to select the pulse polarity of runt trigger.
: positive polarity. The instrument triggers on the positive runt pulse.
: negative polarity. The instrument triggers on the negative runt pulse.
5-14
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Qualifier:
Press Qualifier to set the trigger conditions of runt trigger.
None: do not set the trigger condition of runt trigger.
>: trigger when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit of pulse width. Press Lower Limit and turn or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the minimum runt pulse width at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the minimum runt pulse width at a relatively larger step. The range available is from 2 ns to 4 s.
<: trigger when the runt pulse width is lower than the upper limit of pulse width.
Press Upper Limit and turn or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the maximum runt pulse width at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the maximum runt pulse width at a relatively larger step. The range available is from 2 ns to 4 s.
<>: trigger when the runt pulse width is greater than the lower limit and lower than the upper limit of pulse width. Press Upper Limit and set the maximum pulse width of runt trigger using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above; the range is from 10 ns to 4 s. Press Lower Limit and set the minimum pulse width of runt trigger using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above; the range is from 2 ns to
3.99 s.
Note: The lower limit of the pulse width must be lower than the upper limit.
Vertical Window and Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, you need to adjust the trigger level to correctly trigger the signal and obtain stable waveform. The adjustment mode of the trigger level is different when different vertical window is selected in the runt trigger. Press Vertical and use to select the desired vertical window or press down Window continuously to switch the vertical window. You can choose to only adjust the upper limit, the lower limit or both of them.
Note: Under the “Runt trigger” menu, you can press TRIGGER LEVEL continuously to switch among different vertical window.
After the vertical window type is selected, you can rotate TRIGGER LEVEL to adjust the trigger level. During the adjustment, two orange trigger level lines and trigger marks ( and ) appear on the screen and move up or down with the rotation of the knob. At the same time, the current trigger level values are displayed at the lower left corner of the screen; wherein, Up Level denotes the trigger level
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-15 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope upper limit and Low Level denotes the trigger level lower limit. The trigger level lines and trigger marks disappear after you stop rotating the knob for about 2 s.
The adjustment mode of the trigger level differs when different vertical window is selected.
: only adjust the upper limit of the trigger level. During the adjustment, the “Up Level” changes accordingly and “Low Level” remains unchanged.
: only adjust the lower limit of the trigger level. During the adjustment, the “Low Level” changes accordingly and the “Up Level” remains unchanged.
: adjust the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time.
During the adjustment, the “Up Level” and “Low Level” change accordingly.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep and select “Auto”, “Normal” or “Single”. For the details, please refer to
“ Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger type.
5-16
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Windows Trigger (Option)
Windows trigger provides a high trigger level and a low trigger level. The oscilloscope triggers when the rising edge of the input signal passes through the high trigger level or when the falling edge of the input signal passes through the low trigger level.
Trigger Type:
Press Type, rotate to select “Windows” and press down . At this point, the trigger setting information is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, . The trigger type is windows trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the difference between the high trigger level and the low trigger level is 1.24
V.
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the signal source list between CH1 and CH2. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Windows Type:
Press Type to select the kind of edge of the input signal on which the oscilloscope triggers.
: trigger on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level is greater than the preset high trigger level.
: trigger on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level is lower than the preset low trigger level.
: trigger on any edge of the input signal when the voltage level meets the preset trigger level.
Trigger Position:
After selecting the windows type, press Position to further specify the time point of trigger by selecting the trigger position.
Enter: trigger when the trigger signal enters the specified trigger level range.
Exit: trigger when the input signal exits the specified trigger level range.
Time: used to specify the hold time of the input signal after entering the specified trigger level range. The instrument triggers when the accumulated hold time is greater than the windows time. The range is from 16 ns to 4 s and
5-17 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope the default is 1.00 μs.
Vertical Window and Trigger Level:
Press Vertical to select the desired vertical window type. Rotate TRIGGER
LEVEL to adjust the trigger level. For the detailed operation, please refer to
“ Vertical Window and Trigger Level”.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep and select “Auto”, “Normal” or “Single”. For the details, please refer to
“ Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger type.
5-18
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Nth Edge Trigger (Option)
Trigger on the nth edge that appears after the specified idle time. For example, in the waveform shown in the figure below, the instrument should trigger on the second rising edge after the specified idle time (the time between two neighbouring rising edges) and the idle time should be set to P<Idle Time<M. Wherein, M is the time between the first rising edge and its previous rising edge and P is the maximum time between the rising edges participate in the counting.
Edge Type=
Edge Num=2
P
M
P<Idle Time<M
Figure 5-5 Nth Edge Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, rotate to select “Nth Edge” and press down . At this point, the trigger setting information is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, . The trigger type is Nth edge trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is 1.94 V.
Source Selection:
Press Source and select CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press Slope to select the kind of edge of the input signal on which the oscilloscope triggers.
: trigger on the rising edge of the input signal when the voltage level meets the specified trigger level.
5-19 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
: trigger on the falling edge of the input signal when the voltage level meets the specified trigger level.
Idle Time:
Press Idle to set the idle time before the edge counting in Nth edge trigger. Use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the idle time at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the idle time at a relatively larger step. The range available is from 16 ns to 4 s.
Edge Number:
Press Edge to set the value of “N” in Nth edge trigger. Use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the number of edges at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the number of edges at a relatively larger step. The range available is from 1 to 65535.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep and select “Auto”, “Normal” or “Single”. For the details, please refer to
“ Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection is grayed out and disabled automatically when the signal source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
Trigger Level:
Use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the level. For the details, please refer to the introduction of “ Trigger Level”.
5-20
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Slope Trigger
In slope trigger, the oscilloscope triggers on the positive slope or negative slope with the specified time.
Trigger Type:
Press Type, rotate to select “Slope” and press down . At this point, the trigger setting information is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, . The trigger type is slope trigger; the trigger source is
CH1; the difference between the upper limit of trigger level and the lower limit of trigger level is 1.24 V.
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the signal source list between CH1 and CH2. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Slope Condition:
In this oscilloscope, positive slope time is defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of trigger level line A and B with the rising edge; negative slope time is defined as the time difference between the two crossing points of trigger level line A and B with the falling edge as shown in the figure below.
A
Up Level
B
Low Level
Positive Slope Time Negative Slope Time
Figure 5-6 Positive Slope Time/Negative Slope Time
Press When to select the desired slope condition.
: trigger when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater than the specified time.
: trigger when the positive slope time of the input signal is lower than the specified time.
: trigger when the positive slope time of the input signal is greater than
5-21 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
the specified lower limit of time and lower than the specified upper limit of time.
: trigger when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater than the specified time.
: trigger when the negative slope time of the input signal is lower than the specified time.
: trigger when the negative slope time of the input signal is greater than the specified lower limit of time and lower than the specified upper limit of time.
Time Setting:
When the Slope Condition is set to , , or , press Time and turn or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the time value at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the time value at a relatively larger step. The range available is from 10 ns to 1 s.
When the Slope Condition is set to or , press Upper Limit and Lower Limit respectively; adjust the time upper limit and lower limit using
or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above. The range of time upper limit is from 20 ns to 1 s. The range of the time lower limit is from 10 ns to 999 ms.
Note: The time lower limit must be lower than the upper limit.
Vertical Window and Trigger Level:
After the trigger condition setting is completed, adjust the trigger level using
TRIGGER LEVEL to correctly trigger the signal and obtain stable waveform. The adjustment mode of the trigger level is different when different vertical window is selected in slope trigger. Press Vertical and use to select the desired vertical window or press down Vertical continuously to switch the vertical window. You can choose to only adjust the upper limit, the lower limit or both of them.
: only adjust the upper limit of the trigger level. During the adjustment,
“UP Level” and “Slew Rate” change accordingly but “Low Level” remains unchanged.
: only adjust the lower limit of the trigger level. During the adjustment,
“Low Level” and “Slew Rate” change accordingly but “UP Level” remains unchanged.
: adjust the upper and lower limits of the trigger level at the same time.
During the adjustment, “UP Level” and “Low Level” change accordingly but
“Slew Rate” remains unchanged.
5-22
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
When the Slope Condition is set to , , , or , the current trigger level and slew rate will be displayed at the lower left corner of the screen, as shown in Figure 5-7 (a). The formula of slew rate is:
SlewRate =
UpLevel - LowLevel
Time
When the Slope Condition is set to or , the current trigger level and slew rate range will be displayed at the lower left corner of the screen, as shown in Figure 5-7 (b). The formula of slew rate range is:
SlewRate =
UpLevel - LowLevel UpLevel - LowLevel
~
UpperLimit LowerLimit
(a) (b)
Figure 5-7 Trigger Level Information
Note: Under the “Slope” trigger menu, you can also press down the trigger level knob continuously to switch the vertical window.
During the adjustment, two orange trigger level lines and two trigger marks ( and
) appear on the screen and move up and down with the rotation of the knob, when stopping turning the knob, the trigger level lines and trigger marks disappear in about 2 s.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep and select “Auto”, “Normal” or “Single”. For the details, please refer to
“Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger type.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-23 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Video Trigger (HDTV Option)
The video signal can include image information and timing information and can adopt various standards and formats. MSO2000A/DS2000A can trigger on the standard video signal field or line of NTSC (National Television Standards Committee),
PAL (Phase Alternating Line), SECAM (Sequential Couleur A Memoire)
or
HDTV (High
Definition Television).
Trigger Type:
Press Type, rotate to select “Video” and press down . At this point, the trigger setting information is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, . The trigger type is video trigger; the trigger source is
CH1; the trigger level is 76.0 mV.
Source Selection:
Press Source to switch the trigger source between CH1 and CH2. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Video Polarity:
Press Polarity to select the desired video polarity. The polarities available are positive polarity ( ) and negative polarity ( ).
Sync:
Press Sync to select the desired sync type.
All Lines: trigger on the first line found.
Line Num: trigger on the specified line.
When this sync trigger mode is selected, you can modify the line number. Press
Line Num and turn or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the line number at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the line number at a relatively larger step.
The range of the line number is from 1 to 525 (NTSC), 1 to 625 (PAL/SECAM), 1 to 525 (480P), 1 to 625 (576P), 1 to 750 (720P), 1 to 1125 (1080P) or 1 to 1125
(1080I).
Odd Field: trigger on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the odd field.
Even Field: trigger on the rising edge of the first ramp pulse in the even field.
5-24
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Video Standard:
Press Standard to select the desired video standard.
NTSC: the field frequency is 60 fields per second and the frame frequency is 30 frames per second. The TV scan line is 525 with the even field goes first and the odd field follows behind.
PAL/SECAM:
--PAL: the frame frequency is 25 frames per second. The TV scan line is 625 with the odd field goes first and the even field follows behind.
--SECAM: the frame frequency is 25 frames per second. The sweep line is 625 with interlaced scan.
480P: the frame frequency is 60 frames per second; the TV scan line is 525; progressive scan; the line frequency is 31.5 kHz.
576P: the frame frequency is 60 frames per second; the TV scan line is 625; progressive scan.
HDTV: The specified video standards are as follows.
720P: the frame frequency is 60 frames per second. The TV scan line is
750. Progressive scan. The line frequency is 45 KHz. The field frequencies available are 60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz and 24 Hz.
1080P: the frame frequency is 60 frames per second. The TV scan line is
1125. Progressive scan. Professional format. The field frequencies available are 60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz and 24 Hz.
1080I: the field frequency is 50 to 60 fields per second and the frame frequency is 25 to 30 frames per second. The TV scan line is 1125.
Interlaced scan. The line frequency is 33.75 KHz. The field frequencies available are 30 Hz, 25 Hz and 24 Hz.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep and select “Auto”, “Normal” or “Single”. For the details, please refer to
“ Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Trigger Level:
Use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the level. For the details, please refer to the introduction of “Trigger Level”.
5-25 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Tips
For a better observation of the waveform details in the video signal, you can set a larger memory depth first.
In the trigger debugging process of video signals, the frequency in different part of the signal can be reflected by different brightness as RIGOL digital oscilloscopes provides the multi-level gray scale display function.
Experienced users can quickly judge the signal quality and discover abnormalities.
5-26
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Pattern Trigger
This trigger mode identifies a trigger condition by looking for a specified pattern. The pattern is a logical “AND” combination of the channels. Each channel can have a value of high (H), low (L) or don’t care (X). A rising or falling edge can be specified for one channel included in the pattern. When an edge is specified, the oscilloscope will trigger at the edge specified if the pattern set for the other channels are true
(namely the actual pattern of the channel is the same with the preset pattern). If no edge is specified, the oscilloscope will trigger on the last edge that makes the pattern true. If all the channels in the pattern are set to “Don’t Care”, the oscilloscope will not trigger.
(CH1-CH2 or D0-D15)
H
L
(CH1-CH2 or D0-D15)
Figure 5-8 Pattern Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type, rotate to select “Pattern” and press down . At this point, the trigger setting information is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, . The trigger type is pattern trigger; the trigger source is
CH1; the trigger level is 1.84 V.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1, CH2 or any channel of
D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Pattern Setting:
Press Code to set the pattern of the current source. At this point, the pattern setting area (as shown in the figure below) is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
5-27 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
: set the pattern of the channel selected to “H”, namely the voltage level is higher than the threshold level of the channel.
: set the pattern of the channel selected to “L”, namely the voltage level is lower than the threshold level of the channel.
: set the pattern of the channel selected to “Don’t Care”, namely this channel is not used as a part of the pattern. When both the channels in the pattern are set to “Don’t Care”, the oscilloscope will not trigger.
or : set the pattern of the channel selected to the rising or falling edge.
Note: Only one rising or falling edge can be specified in the pattern. If one edge item is currently defined and then another edge item is defined in another channel in the pattern, the former edge item defined will be replaced by X.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep and select “Auto”, “Normal” or “Single”. For the details, please refer to
“Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection are grayed out and disabled automatically when the signal source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
Trigger Level:
The trigger level of each channel needs to be set independently. For example, set the trigger level of CH1. Press Source and select CH1; use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the level. For the details, please refer to the introduction of “ Trigger Level”.
5-28
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Delay Trigger (Option)
In delay trigger, you need to set signal source A and signal source B. The oscilloscope triggers when the time difference ( △ T) between the specified edges of source A
(Edge A) and source B (Edge B) meets the preset time limit, as shown in the figure below.
Note: Edge A and Edge B must be neighbouring edges.
Edge A=
Edge B=
Source A
Source B
T
Figure 5-9 Delay Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type to open the trigger type list. Rotate and press down to select
“Delay”. At this point, the trigger setting information as shown in the figure below is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, .
The trigger type is delay trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is -1.80 V.
Source A:
Press SourceA to select CH1, CH2 or any of D0-D15 as the trigger source of signal source A. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “ Trigger Source”. The signal source currently selected is displayed in the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Edge A:
Press EdgeA to select the trigger edge type of signal source A in delay trigger. It can be set to the rising edge ( ) or falling edge ( ).
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-29 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Source B:
Press SourceB to select CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15 as the trigger source of signal source B. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “ Trigger Source”.
The signal source currently selected is displayed in the upper-right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Edge B:
Press EdgeB to select the trigger edge type of signal source B in delay trigger. It can be set to the rising edge ( ) or falling edge ( ).
Delay Type:
Press DelayType to set the time limit condition of delay trigger.
>: trigger when the time difference ( △ T) between the specified edges of source
A and source B is greater than the preset time limit. Press Time and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the delay time of delay trigger at a relatively smaller step or use the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the delay time of delay trigger at a relatively larger step. The settable range is from 2 ns to 4 s.
<: trigger when the time difference ( △ T) between the specified edges of source
A and source B is lower than the preset time limit. Press Time and adjust the delay time of delay trigger using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above. The settable range is from 2 ns to 4 s.
<>: trigger when the time difference ( △ T) between the specified edges of source A and source B is greater than the lower limit of the preset time and lower than the upper limit of the preset time. Press Upper Limit and adjust the delay time upper limit of delay trigger using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above; the settable range is from 12 ns to 4 s. Press Lower Limit and adjust the delay time lower limit of delay trigger using
or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above; the settable range is from 2 ns to 3.99 s.
Note: The time lower limit must be lower than the time upper limit.
><: trigger when the time difference ( △ T) between the specified edges of source A and source B is lower than the lower limit of the preset time or greater than the upper limit of the preset time. Press Upper Limit and adjust the delay time upper limit of delay trigger using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above; the settable range is from 12 ns to 4 s. Press
5-30
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Lower Limit and adjust the delay time lower limit of delay trigger using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above; the settable range is from 2 ns to 3.99 s.
Note: The time lower limit must be lower than the time upper limit.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep to open the trigger mode list and select “Auto”, “Normal” or ”Single”.
For the details, please refer to “ Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection is grayed out and disabled automatically when the signal source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
Trigger Level:
Press SourceA and use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the trigger level of source A.
Press SourceB and use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the trigger level of source B.
For the details, please refer to the introduction of “ Trigger Level”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-31 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
TimeOut Trigger (Option)
In timeout trigger, the instrument triggers when the time interval ( △ T) from when the rising edge (or falling edge) of the input signal passes through the trigger level to when the neighbouring falling edge (or rising edge) passes through the trigger level is greater than the timeout time set, as shown in the figure below.
T Time Out< T
Time Out
Figure 5-10 TimeOut Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type to open the trigger type list. Rotate and press down to select
“TimeOut”. At this point, the trigger setting information as shown in the figure below is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, .
The trigger type is timeout trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is -1.80
V.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1, CH2 or any channel of
D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Edge Type:
Press Slope to select the type of the first edge of the input signal that passes through the trigger level.
: start timing when the rising edge of the input signal passes through the trigger level.
: start timing when the falling edge of the input signal passes through the trigger level.
: start timing when any edge of the input signal passes through the trigger
5-32
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL level.
Timeout Time:
The timeout time refers to the longest period of time that the signal remains unchanged after it passes through the trigger level. Press TimeOut and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the timeout time at a relatively smaller step or use the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the timeout time at a relatively larger step. The range is from 16 ns to 4 s.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep to open the trigger mode list and select “Auto”, “Normal” or ”Single”.
For the details, please refer to “Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection is grayed out and disabled automatically when the signal source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
Trigger Level:
Use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the level. For the details, please refer to the introduction of “Trigger Level”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-33 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Duration Trigger (Option)
In duration trigger, the instrument identifies a trigger condition by looking for the duration of a specified pattern. This pattern is a logical “AND” combination of the two channels. Each channel can have a value of high (H), low (L) or don’t care (X). The instrument triggers when the duration ( △ T) of this pattern meets the preset time, as shown in the figure below.
T
T CH1=H
CH2=L
CH1
CH2
Figure 5-11 Duration Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type to open the trigger type list. Rotate and press down to select
“Duration”. At this point, the trigger setting information as shown in the figure below is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, .
The trigger type is duration trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is 0.00
V.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1, CH2 or any channel of
D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Pattern Setting:
Press Code to set the pattern of the current channel. At this point, the pattern setting area (as shown in the figure below) is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
: set the pattern of the channel selected to “H”, namely the voltage level is higher than the threshold level of the channel.
5-34
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
: set the pattern of the channel selected to “L”, namely the voltage level is lower than the threshold level of the channel.
: set the pattern of the channel selected to “Don’t Care”, namely this channel is not used as a part of the pattern. When both the channels in the pattern are set to “Don’t Care”, the oscilloscope will not trigger.
Trigger Condition:
Press When to select the desired trigger condition.
>: trigger when the duration of the pattern is greater than the preset time.
Press Time and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the duration of duration trigger at a relatively smaller step or use the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the duration of duration trigger at a relatively larger step. The range is from 2 ns to 4 s.
<: trigger when the duration of the pattern is lower than the preset time. Press
Time and adjust the duration of duration trigger using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above. The range is from 2 ns to 4 s.
<>: trigger when the duration of the pattern is lower than the upper limit of the preset time and greater than the lower limit of the preset time. Press Upper
Limit and adjust the duration upper limit of duration trigger using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above; the range is from
12 ns to 4 s. Press Lower Limit and adjust the duration lower limit of duration trigger using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above; the range is from 2 ns to 3.99 s.
Note: The time lower limit must be lower than the time upper limit.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep to open the trigger mode list and select “Auto”, “Normal” or ”Single”.
For the details, please refer to “ Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection is grayed out and disabled automatically when the signal source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
Trigger Level:
The trigger level of each channel needs to be set independently. For example, set the trigger level of CH1. Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1; use
TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the level. For the details, please refer to the introduction of “Trigger Level”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-35 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Setup/Hold Trigger
In setup/hold trigger, you need to set the data signal line and clock signal line. The setup time starts when the data signal passes the trigger level/threshold level and ends at the coming of the specified clock edge; the hold time starts at the coming of the specified clock edge and ends when the data signal passes the trigger level/threshold level again (as shown in the figure below). During the setup or hold, the data signal must remain a valid pattern. The oscilloscope triggers when the setup time or hold time is lower than the preset time.
T1
T2
T1 is the setup time
T2 is the hold time
Data Source
Clock Source
The edge type is The data type is H
Figure 5-12 Setup/Hold Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type to open the trigger type list. Rotate and press down to select
“Setup/Hold”. At this point, the trigger setting information as shown in the figure below is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example,
. The trigger type is setup/hold trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is -1.80 V.
Source Selection:
Press DataSrc and ClkSrc to set the signal sources of the data line and clock line respectively. They can be set to CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
5-36
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Edge Type:
Press Slope to select the desired clock edge type and it can be set to the rising edge
( ) or falling edge ( ).
Data Type:
Press Pattern to set the effective pattern of the data signal to H (high level) or L
(low level).
Setup Type:
Press SetupType to select the desired setup type.
Setup: the oscilloscope will trigger only according to the setup time. Press
Setup; use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the setup time at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the setup time at a relatively larger step. The adjustable range is from 2 ns to 1 s.
Hold: the oscilloscope will trigger only according to the hold time. Press Hold and adjust the hold time using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above. The adjustable range is from 2 ns to 1 s.
SetupHold: the oscilloscope will trigger according to both the setup time and hold time. Press Setup and Hold respectively; adjust the setup time and hold time using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above. Both the adjustable ranges are from 2 ns to 1 s.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep to open the trigger mode list and select “Auto”, “Normal” or ”Single”.
For the details, please refer to “Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection is grayed out and disabled automatically when the signal source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
Trigger Level:
Press DataSrc and use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the trigger level of the data source channel. Press ClkSrc and use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the trigger level of the clock source channel. For the details, please refer to the introduction of
“Trigger Level”.
5-37 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
RS232 Trigger
RS232 bus is a serial communication mode used in the data transmission between
PCs or between PC and terminal. In RS232 serial protocol, a character is transmitted as a frame of data which consists of 1 bit start bit, 5~8 bits data bits, 1 bit check bit and 1~2 bits stop bit(s). Its format is as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-13 RS232 Trigger
MSO2000A/DS2000A oscilloscope triggers when the start frame, error frame, check error or the specified data of the RS232 signal is detected.
Trigger Type:
Press Type to open the trigger type list. Rotate and press down to select
“RS232”. At this point, the trigger setting information as shown in the figure below is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, .
The trigger type is RS232 trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is -1.80
V.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1, CH2 or any channel of
D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Polarity:
Press Polarity to select the polarity of date transmission. It can be set to “Normal” or “Invert” and the default is normal.
Trigger Condition:
Press When to select the desired trigger condition.
Start: trigger on the start frame position.
5-38
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Error: trigger when error frame is detected. After this trigger condition is selected:
--press Stop Bit to select “1 bit” or “2 bit”;
--press Even-Odd to select “None”, “Odd” or “Even”.
The oscilloscope will determine error frame according to the preset parameters.
Check Error: trigger when check error is detected. When this trigger condition is selected:
--press Stop Bit to select “1 bit” or “2 bit”.
--press Even-Odd to select “Odd” or “Even”.
The oscilloscope will determine check error according to the current settings.
Data: trigger on the last bit of the preset data bits. When this trigger condition is selected:
--press Data Bits to select “5 bit”, “6 bit”, “7 bit” or “8 bit”;
--press Data and input the data value according to the setting in Data Bits and the ranges are from 0 to 31, from 0 to 63, from 0 to 127 and from 0 to 255 respectively.
--press Stop Bit to select “1 bit” or “2 bit”.
--press Even-Odd to select “None”, “Odd” or “Even”.
Baud Rate:
Set the baud rate of data transmission (equal to specifying a clock frequency). Press
Baud to set the desired baud rate to 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps (default), 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps, 230400 bps, 460800 bps, 921600 bps, 1
Mbps or User. When “User” is selected, press Setup and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the baud rate at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the baud rate at a relatively larger step.
The adjustable range is from 110 bps to 20 Mbps.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep to open the trigger mode list and select “Auto”, “Normal” or ”Single”.
For the details, please refer to “Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (trigger holdoff and noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection is grayed out and disabled automatically when the signal source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-39 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Trigger Level:
Use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the level. For the details, please refer to the introduction of “ Trigger Level”.
5-40
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
I2C Trigger
I2C is a 2-wire serial bus used to connect the microcontroller and its peripheral device and is a bus standard widely used in the microelectronic communication control field.
The I2C serial bus consists of SCL and SDA. Its transmission rate is determined by
SCL and its transmission data is determined by SDA, as shown in the figure below.
MSO2000A/DS2000A triggers on start condition, restart condition, stop condition, missing acknowledgement, specific device address or data value. Besides, it can also trigger on the specific device address and data value at the same time.
Figure 5-14 I2C Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type to open the trigger type list. Rotate and press down to select
“I2C”. At this point, the trigger setting information as shown in the figure below is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, .
The trigger type is I2C trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is 0.00 V.
Source Selection:
Press SCL and SDA to specify the signal sources of SCL and SDA respectively. They can be set to CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “ Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-41 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Trigger Condition:
Press When to select the desired trigger condition.
Start: trigger when SDA data transitions from high to low while SCL is high.
Restart: trigger when another start condition occurs before a stop condition.
Stop: trigger when SDA data transitions from low to high while SCL is high.
Missing ACK: trigger when the SDA data is high during any acknowledgement of
SCL clock position.
Address: trigger on the read or write bit when the preset address is met. After this trigger condition is selected:
--press AddrBits to select “7 bit”, “8 bit” or “10 bit”;
--press Address to set the address value according to the setting in AddrBits and the ranges are from 0 to 127, from 0 to 255 and from 0 to 1023 respectively;
--press Direction to select “Read”, “Write” or “R/W”.
Note: This setting is not available when AddrBits is set to “8 bit”.
Data: Find the preset data value on SDA, and trigger on the dump edge of the
SCL of the last bit of the data. After this trigger condition is selected:
--press Byte Length to set the length of the data and the range is from 1 to 5;
--press CurrentBit to select the desired data bit and the range is from 0 to
(Byte Length×8-1);
--press Data to set the data pattern of the current data bit to X, H or L.
--press AllBits to set the data pattern of all the data bits to the data pattern specified in Data.
A&D: trigger when the “Address” and “Data” conditions are met at the same time. After this trigger condition is selected:
--press AddrBits to select “7 bit”, “8 bit” or “10 bit”;
--press Address to set the address value according to the setting in AddrBits and the ranges are from 0 to 127, from 0 to 255 and from 0 to 1023 respectively;
--press Byte Length to set the length of the data and the range is from 1 to 5;
--press CurrentBit to select the desired data bit and the range is from 0 to
(Byte Length×8-1);
--press Data to set the data pattern of the current data bit to X, H or L.
--press AllBits to set the data pattern of all the data bits to the data pattern specified in Data.
--press Direction to select “Read”, “Write” or “R/W”.
Note: This setting is not available when AddrBits is set to “8 bit”.
5-42
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep to open the trigger mode list and select “Auto”, “Normal” or ”Single”.
For the details, please refer to “Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection is grayed out and disabled automatically when the signal source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
Trigger Level:
Press SCL and use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the trigger level of the SCL channel. Press SDA and use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the trigger level of the
SDA channel. For the details, please refer to the introduction of “Trigger Level”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-43 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
SPI Trigger
Trigger on the data pattern on the specified edge. When using SPI trigger, you need to specify the SCL and SDA data sources. Below is the sequence chart of SPI bus data transmission.
Processor 1[SPI Host]
SDOx
Serial Data Line Buffer
(SPIxRXB)
Shift Register
SPIxSR
Highest Bit Lowest Bit
SDIx
Serial Transmission Buffer
(SPIxTXB)
Processor 2[SPI Slave]
SDIx
Serial Data Line Buffer
(SPIxRXB)
SDOx
Highest Bit
Shift Register
SPIxSR
Lowest Bit
Serial Transmission Buffer
(SPIxTXB )
SPI Buffer
SPIxBUF
SCKx
Serial Clock
SCKx SPI Buffer
SPIxBUF
Figure 5-15 SPI Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type to open the trigger type list. Rotate and press down to select
“SPI”. At this point, the trigger setting information as shown in the figure below is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, .
The trigger type is SPI trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is 0.00 V.
Source Selection:
Press SCL and SDA to specify the data sources of SCL and SDA respectively. They can be set to CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “ Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
5-44
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Trigger Condition:
Press When to select the desired trigger condition.
CS: while the CS signal is valid, the oscilloscope begins to search for the data
(SDA) satisfying the conditions and triggers when it is found. After this trigger condition is selected:
--press CS to select the CS signal source. It can be set to CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “ Trigger
Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper-right corner of the screen.
--press Mode to set the CS mode to (the high level is valid) or (the low level is valid).
TimeOut: after the clock signal (SCL) remains in idle status for the specified time, the oscilloscope begins to search for the data (SDA) satisfying the conditions and triggers when it is found. After this trigger condition is selected, press
TimeOut and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the minimum time of the idle status at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the minimum time of the idle status at a relatively larger step. The adjustable range is from 100 ns to 1 s.
Data Line Setting:
Press Data to enter the data line setting menu.
Press Data Bits to set the number of bits of the serial data character string. It can be set to any integer between 4 and 32.
Press CurrentBit to set the number of the data bit and the range is from 0 to
(value specified in Data Bits – 1).
Press Data to set the value of the current bit to H, L or X.
Press AllBits to set all the data bits to the value specified in Data.
Clock Edge:
Press Clock Edge to select the desired clock edge.
: sample the SDA data on the rising edge of the clock signal.
: sample the SDA data on the falling edge of the clock signal.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep to open the trigger mode list and select “Auto”, “Normal” or ”Single”.
For the details, please refer to “Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
5-45 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection is grayed out and disabled automatically when the signal source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
Trigger Level:
Press SCL and use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the trigger level of the SCL channel. Press SDA and use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the trigger level of the
SDA channel. For the details, please refer to the introduction of “ Trigger Level”.
5-46
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
USB Trigger (Option)
Trigger on the SOP, EOP, RC, Suspend and Exit Suspend of the data packet on the differential USB data cable (D+ and D-). This trigger supports USB Low Speed and
Full Speed. The figure below shows the USB data transmission protocol.
Figure 5-16 USB Trigger
Trigger Type:
Press Type to open the trigger type list. Rotate and press down to select
“USB”. At this point, the trigger setting information as shown in the figure below is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example, .
The trigger type is USB trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is 0.00 V.
Source Selection:
Press D+ and D- to specify data sources for D+ and D- data cables respectively.
They can be set to CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “ Trigger Source”. The current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Signal Speed:
Press Speed to select “Low Speed” (1.5 Mb/s) or “Full Speed” (12 Mb/s).
Trigger Condition:
Press When to select the desired trigger condition.
SOP: trigger at the sync bit at the start of the data packet (SOP).
EOP: trigger at the end of the SEO portion of the EOP of the data packet.
RC: trigger when SEO is greater than 10 ms.
Suspend: trigger when the idle state of the bus is greater than 3 ms.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-47 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
ExitSuspend: trigger when the bus exits from idle state for more than 10 ms.
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep to open the trigger mode list and select “Auto”, “Normal” or ”Single”.
For the details, please refer to “Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection is grayed out and disabled automatically when the signal source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
Trigger Level:
Press D+ and use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the trigger level of the D+ channel. Press D- and use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the trigger level of the D- channel. For the details, please refer to the introduction of “Trigger Level”.
5-48
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
CAN Trigger (Option)
MSO2000A/DS2000A oscilloscope provides CAN bus trigger and decoding functions for better CAN bus analysis.
Trigger on the start frame, end frame, specified frame type or error frame of the CAN signal. When using CAN trigger, you need to specify the signal source, signal rate and trigger signal type of the CAN signal. The figure below shows the standard and expanded formats of CAN bus data frame.
Figure 5-17 Standard and Expanded Formats of CAN Bus Data Frame
Trigger Type:
Press Type; rotate and press down to select “CAN”. At this point, the trigger setting information is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen. For example,
. The trigger type is CAN trigger; the trigger source is CH1; the trigger level is 62.5 mV.
Source Selection:
Press Source to open the signal source list and select CH1, CH2 or any channel of
D0-D15. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “Trigger Source”. The
5-49 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope current trigger source is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: Select channel with signal input as trigger source to obtain stable trigger.
Signal Type:
Press Signal Type to select the desired signal type.
Rx: receiving signal on the CAN signal line.
Tx: transmission signal on the CAN signal line.
CAN_H: actual CAN_H bus signal.
CAN_L: actual CAN_L bus signal.
Differential: CAN differential bus signal connected to the analog channel via the differential probe.
Trigger Condition:
Press When to select the desired trigger condition.
SOF: trigger on the start of the data frame.
EOF: trigger on the end of the data frame.
Frame Type: after this type is selected, press Frame Type to select to trigger on the “Data”, “Remote”, “Error” or “OverLoad” frame. Set the following parameters when “Data” or “Remote” is selected.
“Data” trigger:
--press ID Setup and select “Specific ID” or “Random ID”. When “Specific ID” is selected, press ID Format to select “Standard” or “Expand”; press ID Data and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the ID data at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the ID data at a relatively larger step. The range is from 0 to 2047 (standard ID format) or 0 to 536870911 (expanded ID format).
--press Byte Length and use to input the desired value. The range is from
1 to 8.
--press CurrentBit to select the desired data bit and the range is from 0 to
(“Byte Length”×8-1).
--press Data to set the data pattern of the current bit to X, H or L.
--press AllBits to set the data pattern of all the data bits to the data pattern specified in Data.
“Remote” trigger:
--press ID Setup and select “Specific ID” or “Random ID”. When “Specific ID” is selected, press ID Format and select “Standard” or “Expand”. Press ID Data and adjust the ID data using or the navigation knob by referring to the
5-50
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL method mentioned above. The range is from 0 to 2047 (standard ID format) or
0 to 536870911 (expanded ID format).
Frame Error: after selecting this type, press Error Type to select to trigger on the “Bit Fill”, “Answer Error”, “Check Error”, “Format Error” or “Random Error”.
Baud:
Press Baud to set the CAN baud to match the CAN bus signal and the values available are 10 kb/s (default), 20 kb/s, 33.3 kb/s, 50 kb/s, 62.5 kb/s, 83.3 kb/s, 100 kb/s, 125 kb/s, 250 kb/s, 500 kb/s, 800 kb/s, 1 Mb/s or user. After “User” is selected, press User and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to modify the baud rate at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the baud rate at a relatively larger step. The adjustable range is from 10 kb/s to 1 Mb/s.
Sample Point:
Sample point is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level at this point. The sample position is represented by the percentage of “the time from the start of the bit’s time to the sample point time” in the “bit’s time”.
Press SamplePoint and use to modify the parameter with a step of 1% and the range is from 5% to 95%.
1Bit
60%
70%
80%
Figure 5-18 Sample Position
Trigger Mode:
Press Sweep to open the trigger mode list and select “Auto”, “Normal” or ”Single”.
For the details, please refer to “Trigger Mode”. The corresponding status light of the current trigger mode turns on.
Trigger Setting:
Press Setting to set the trigger parameters (noise rejection) under this trigger type.
Note: Noise rejection is grayed out and disabled automatically when the signal source is set to any channel of D0-D15.
5-51 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
Trigger Level:
Use TRIGGER LEVEL to modify the level. For the details, please refer to the introduction of “ Trigger Level”.
5-52
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope RIGOL
Trigger Output Connector
The trigger output connector ([Trigger Out]) at the rear panel of the oscilloscope can output trigger signals determined by the current setting.
Trigger Output Connector
The oscilloscope can output a signal that reflects the current capture rate of the oscilloscope from the [Trigger Out] connector each time a trigger is generated.
Connect the signal to a waveform display device and measure the signal frequency; the measurement result is the same with the current capture rate.
Note: If Utility AuxOutput is set to “PassFail” or Utility Pass/Fail
AuxOutput is set to “ON”, during the pass/fail test, the oscilloscope will output a negative pulse through the [Trigger Out] connector each time a failure is detected; the oscilloscope will output low level continuously through the [Trigger Out] connector when no failure is detected.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
5-53 [email protected]
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
MSO2000A/DS2000A can make math operation, auto measurement and cursor measurement on sampled and displayed data.
The contents of this chapter:
Math Operation
Auto Measurement
Cursor Measurement
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Math Operation
MSO2000A/DS2000A can realize various math operations (including: addition (A+B), subtraction (A-B), multiplication (AxB), division (A÷B), FFT, digital filter, logic operation and advanced operation) of waveforms between channels. The results of math operation also allow further measurement.
Press MATH Operate in the vertical control area (VERTICAL) at the front panel to select the desired operation function. The result of math operation is displayed on the waveform marked with “M” on the screen.
Addition
Add the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by point and display the results. Press MATH Operate to select “A+B”:
Press Source A and Source B respectively to select the desired channels (CH1 or CH2).
Press and use to adjust the vertical position of the operation results.
Press and use to adjust the vertical scale of the operation results.
Press Invert to turn the inverted display of the operation results on or off.
Press Label to define a label for the operation results. For the details, please refer to “ MATH Label”.
HORIZONTAL POSITION and HORIZONTAL SCALE can also be used to adjust the horizontal position and scale of the operation results.
Subtraction
Subtract the waveform voltage values of signal source B from that of source A point by point and display the results. Press MATH Operate to select “A-B”:
Press Source A and Source B respectively to select the desired channels (CH1 or CH2).
Press and use to adjust the vertical position of the operation results.
Press and use to adjust the vertical scale of the operation results.
Press Invert to turn the inverted display of the operation results on or off.
6-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
Press Label to define a label for the operation results. For the details, please refer to “ MATH Label”.
HORIZONTAL POSITION and HORIZONTAL SCALE can also be used to adjust the horizontal position and scale of the operation results.
Multiplication
Multiply the waveform voltage values of signal source A and B point by point and display the results. Press MATH Operate to select “A x B”:
Press Source A and Source B respectively to select the desired channels (CH1 or CH2).
Press and use to adjust the vertical position of the operation results.
Press and use to adjust the vertical scale of the operation results.
Press Invert to turn the inverted display of the operation results on or off.
Press Label to define a label for the operation results. For the details, please refer to “ MATH Label”.
HORIZONTAL POSITION and HORIZONTAL SCALE can also be used to adjust the horizontal position and scale of the operation results.
Division
Divide the waveform voltage values of signal source A by that of source B point by point and display the results. It can be used to analyze the multiple relationships of waveforms in the two channels.
Note: When the waveform voltage value of signal source B is 0, the result of the division is treated as 0.
Press MATH Operate to select “A ÷ B”:
Press Source A and Source B respectively to select the desired channels (CH1 or CH2).
Press and use to adjust the vertical position of the operation results.
Press and use to adjust the vertical scale of the operation results.
Press Invert to turn the inverted display of the operation results on or off.
Press Label to define a label for the operation results. For the details, please refer to “ MATH Label”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
HORIZONTAL POSITION and HORIZONTAL SCALE can also be used to adjust the horizontal position and scale of the operation results.
6-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
FFT
FFT is used to quickly perform Fourier transform on specified signals and transform time domain signals to frequency domain signals. MSO2000A/DS2000A oscilloscope provides FFT operation function which enables users to observe the time domain waveform and spectrum of the signal at the same time. FFT operation can facilitate the following works:
Measure harmonic components and distortion in the system
Measure the characteristics of the noise in DC power
Analyze vibration
Press MATH Operate to select “FFT” and set the parameters of FFT operation.
Frequency Domain Waveform Time Domain Waveform
Vertical Amplitude Horizontal Scale FFT Sample Rate Center Frequency
Figure 6-1 FFT Operation
1.
Select Source
Press Source to select the desired channel (CH1 or CH2).
2.
Select Window Function
Spectral leakage can be considerably decreased when a window function is used.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
MSO2000A/DS2000A provides four kinds of FFT window functions which have different characteristics and are applicable to measure different waveforms. You need to select the window function according to the waveform to be measured and its characteristics. Press Window to select the desired window function and the default is “Rectangle”.
Table 6-1 Window Functions
Window
Hanning
Characteristics
Rectangle The best frequency resolution; the poorest amplitude resolution; similar to the situation when no window is multiplied.
Better frequency resolution; poorer amplitude resolution.
Waveforms Suitable for
Measurement
Transient or short pulse, the signal levels before and after the multiplication are basically the same;
Sine waveforms with the same amplitude and rather similar frequencies;
Wide band random noise with relatively slowly changing waveform spectrum.
Sine, periodic and narrow band random noise.
Hamming A little bit better frequency resolution than Hanning
Blackman The best amplitude resolution; the poorest frequency resolution
Transient or short pulse, the signal levels before and after the multiplication are rather different.
Single frequency signal, search for higher order harmonics.
3.
Set the Display Mode
Press Display to select “Split” (default) or “Full Screen” display mode.
Split: the source channel and the FFT operation results are displayed separately.
The time domain and frequency domain signals are displayed clearly.
Full Screen: the source channel and the FFT operation results are displayed in the same window to view the frequency spectrum more clearly and to perform more precise measurement.
6-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
Note: In FFT mode and when MATH is the active channel, you can also press
HORIZONTAL SCALE to switch between “Split” and “Full Screen”.
4.
Set Horizontal Position and Horizontal Scale
The horizontal axis of the FFT operation results represents frequency and its unit is Hz. Use HORIZONTAL POSITION and HORIZONTAL SCALE to set the horizontal position and horizontal scale of the FFT frequency domain waveform respectively.
Note: Setting the horizontal position can changing the center frequency of the
FFT operation results indirectly.
5.
Set the Vertical Unit
Press Scale to set the vertical unit to dB or Vrms and the default is dB. dB and
Vrms use logarithmic mode and linear mode to display vertical amplitude respectively. If you need to display the FFT frequency spectrum in a relatively larger dynamic range, dB is recommended.
6.
Set Vertical Position and Vertical Scale
Press and and use to set the vertical offset and vertical scale of the FFT frequency domain waveform respectively.
7.
Anti-Aliasing
Press Scale to enable or disable the anti-aliasing function.
8.
Label
Press Label to define a label for the operation results. For the details, please refer to “ MATH Label”.
Tips
Signals with DC components or deviation would cause error or deviation of the FFT waveform components. To reduce the DC components, set the
“Channel Coupling” to “AC”.
To reduce the random noise and aliasing frequency components of repetitive or single pulse, set the “Acquisition Mode” of the oscilloscope to “Average”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Digital Filter
MSO2000A/DS2000A provides 4 types of digital filters (Low Pass Filter, High Pass
Filter, Band Pass Filter and Band Reject Filter). The frequencies with the specified waveform band can be filtered by setting the bandwidth range.
Press MATH Operate to select “Digital Filter” and set the parameters of the digital filter.
1.
Select the Filter Type
Press Filter Type to select the desired filter type.
: low pass, namely only the signals whose frequency are lower than the current Upper Limit can pass the filter.
: high pass, namely only the signals whose frequency are greater than the current Lower Limit can pass the filter.
: band pass, namely only the signals whose frequency are greater than the current Lower Limit and lower than the current Upper Limit can pass the filter.
: band reject, namely only the signals whose frequency are lower than the current Lower Limit or greater than the current Upper Limit can pass the filter.
2.
Select the Source
Press Source to select the desired channel (CH1 or CH2).
3.
Set the Bandwidth
When “low pass” filter type is selected, you only need to set the frequency upper limit; when “high pass” filter type is selected, you only need to set the frequency lower limit; when “band pass” or “band reject” filter type is selected, you need to set both the frequency upper limit and lower limit.
Note: The settable range of the bandwidth is related to the current horizontal time base.
Press Upper Limit and use to adjust the frequency upper limit of the filter.
Press Lower Limit and use to adjust the frequency lower limit of the filter.
6-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
4.
Adjust the Vertical Position and Vertical Scale
Press and respectively and use to adjust the vertical position and vertical scale of the operation result.
5.
Adjust the Horizontal Position and Horizontal Scale
Use HORIZONTAL POSITION and HORIZONTAL SCALE to adjust the horizontal position and horizontal scale of the operation result respectively.
6.
Label
Press Label to define a label for the math operation result. For the details, please refer to the introduction in “ MATH Label”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Logic Operation
Perform logic operation on the waveform voltage values of the specified sources point by point and display the results. In operation, when the voltage value of the source channel is greater than the threshold of the corresponding channel, it is regarded as logic “1”; otherwise logic “0”. The following common logic operation expressions are provided.
Table 6-2 Logic Operation
Operation Description
AND
The results of logic AND operation of two binary bits are as follows:
A B A AND B
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
OR
NOT
XOR
The results of logic OR operation of two binary bits are as follows:
A B A OR B
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
The results of logic NOT operation of one binary bit are as follows:
A NOT A
0 1
1 0
The results of logic XOR operation of two binary bits are as follows:
A B A XOR B
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
6-10
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
Press MATH Operate to select “Logic”:
Press Formula to select the desired logic formula and the default is “AND”.
Press Source A and Source B respectively to select the desired channels (CH1,
CH2 or any channel of D0-D15).
Press and use to adjust the vertical position of the operation results.
Press and use to adjust the vertical scale of the operation results.
Press Invert to turn the inverted display of the operation results on or off.
Press Threshold A and use to set the threshold of source A in logic operation.
Press Threshold B and use to set the threshold of source B in logic operation.
Note: When Source A or Source B is set to any channel of D0-D15,
Threshold A or Threshold B will be hidden automatically and cannot be set.
Press Label to define a label for the operation results. For the details, please refer to “ MATH Label”.
HORIZONTAL POSITION and HORIZONTAL SCALE can also be used to adjust the horizontal position and scale of the operation results.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-11 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Advanced Operation
MSO2000A/DS2000A provides advanced operation function that allows users to define operation functions. Press MATH Operate “Advanced” Expression
“ON” and the editing window as shown in the figure below is displayed.
Figure 6-2 Advanced Operation Editing Window
Turn to select any item in “Channel”, “Function”, “Variable”, “Operator” and
“Figure” (the items in white can be selected currently and the items in gray cannot be selected currently), then press down the knob and the item selected will de displayed in the entry box on the right of the “Expression”.
During the expression editing, you can press Delete to delete the character currently at the left of the cursor and press Clear to delete all the characters in the entry box at any time. After finishing the expression editing, press Apply and the oscilloscope will operate according to the expression you set and display the result.
Note: After Apply is pressed, the Expression menu will be automatically set to
“OFF” but the preset expression will still be displayed at the bottom of the screen for your reference.
In addition, you can also press Invert to turn the inverted display of the operation results on or off or press Label to set label for the math operation results (for the details, refer to the introduction in “ MATH Label”).
The following are descriptions of the contents in the editing window.
1.
Expression
Here, it refers to the formulas formed by channel, function, variable, operator and figure. The length of the expression should not exceed 64 characters.
6-12
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
2.
Channel
You can select any channel of CH1 and CH2 or select both of the two channels.
3.
Function
The functions of the functions are listed in the following table.
Note: The left brackets “(” here are only used to facilitate your entry and they are not a part of the function names.
Table 6-3 Functions
Name
Intg(
Function
Calculate the integral of the selected source. You can use integral
Diff( to measure the area under a waveform or the pulse energy.
Calculate the discrete time differential of the selected source. You can use differential to measure the instantaneous slope of a
Lg( waveform.
Calculate the common logarithm of the selected source (use 10 as the base).
Calculate the exponent of the selected source. For example, Exp(
Sqrt(
Sine(
Exp(A) means calculate the Ath power of e.
Calculate the square root of the selected source.
Calculate the sine value of the selected source.
Cosine( Calculate the cosine value of the selected source.
Tangent( Calculate the tangent value of the selected source.
4.
Variable
Users can set the desired values of Variable1 and Variable2 using the following method.
Press Variable to turn on the variable setting menu.
Variable: press this softkey to select the variable to be set as “Variable1” and “Variable2”.
Step: press this softkey to set the step used when using to modify the
“Mantissa”. The steps available are × 1, × 0.1, × 0.01, × 0.001 and ×
0.0001.
Mantissa: press this softkey and turn to modify the mantissa at the step specified in Step. The range available is from -9.9999 to 9.9999.
Exponent: press this softkey to set the numeric values of the exponents with 10 as the bottom number in the variables. The range is from -9 to 9.
6-13 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
For example, Variable1 is set to 6.1074×10 8 via the following settings.
Variable: Variable1
Mantissa: 6.1074
Exponent: 8
5.
Operator
The functions of the operators are listed in the following table.
Table 6-4 Operators
Operator
+ - * /
( )
Function
Arithmetic operators: add, subtract, multiply and divide
Parentheses: used to increase the priority of the operation enclosed in the parentheses
< > <= >=
== !=
Relationship operators: lower than, greater than, lower than or equal to, greater than or equal to, equal to, not equal to
!( || && Logic operator: NOT, OR, AND
6.
Figure
Select from figure 0 to 9, decimal point and character E. Wherein, character E represents the nth power of 10. For example, 1.5E3 means 1.5×10 3 .
MATH Label
The instrument uses to mark the math operation results by default. For ease of use, you can also set a label for the math operation results, for example, .
Press MATH Operate to select the desired math operation and press Label to open the label input interface. Then, input the desired label according to the instructions in “ Channel Label”.
Note: The user-defined label can include uppercase English letters (from A to Z), lowercase English letters (from a to z), numbers (from 0 to 9), underline and space; the length of the label cannot exceed 4 characters.
6-14
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
Auto Measurement
MSO2000A/DS2000A provides auto measurements of 29 waveform parameters and the statistics and analysis of the measurement results. What’s more, you can also use the frequency counter to realize more precise frequency measurement.
Quick Measurement after AUTO
When a valid signal is input into the oscilloscope, press AUTO to enable the waveform auto setting function and open the auto setting menu.
: press this softkey and the oscilloscope automatically displays a single period of the signal on the screen and measures the “Period” and “Frequency” of the single period waveform currently displayed. The measurement results are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
: press this softkey and the oscilloscope automatically displays multiple periods of the signal on the screen and measures the “Period” and “Frequency” of the multiple-period waveform currently displayed. The measurement results are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
: press this softkey and the oscilloscope automatically displays a rising edge of the signal on the screen and measures the “Rise Time” of the rising edge currently displayed. The measurement result is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
: press this softkey and the oscilloscope automatically displays a falling edge of the signal on the screen and measures the “Fall Time” of the falling edge currently displayed. The measurement result is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Pressing Undo softkey will automatically give up the auto setting and restore the parameter settings before AUTO is pressed.
Besides, you can set the channel coupling mode after AUTO operation (please refer to “Auto Setting”).
6-15 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Note: The waveform auto setting function requires that the frequency of the sine should be no lower than 25 Hz. If the parameter exceeds the limit, the waveform auto setting function might be invalid.
6-16
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
One-key Measurement of 29 Parameters
Press MENU at the left of the screen to turn on the measurement menu of the 29 parameters and then press the corresponding menu softkey to quickly realize
“One-key” measurement. The measurement result will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Note: Press Measure Source to select the current measurement source. When the measurement source is set to any channel of D0-D15, “One-key” measurement only supports period, frequency, positive pulse width, negative pulse width, positive duty cycle, negative duty cycle, delay and phase.
The menu item icons and measurement results of time, voltage and area parameters are always in the same color as the current measurement channel (Measure
Source). The menu item icons and measurement results of delay and phase parameters are always in white; the numbers in the menu item icons and results denote source A and source B currently selected (when the signal source is an analog channel, the color of the number is the same as that of the channel selected; when the source channel is a digital channel, the number is always in green).
Note: If the measurement result is displayed as “*****”, there is no signal input into the current measurement source or the measurement result is out of the valid range
(too large or too small).
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-17 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Time Parameters
RiseTime
FallTime
Threshold
Upper Limit
+Width -Width
Threshold
Middle Value
Threshold
Lower Limit
Period
Figure 6-3 Time Parameters
1.
Period: the time between the threshold middle value of one edge to the threshold middle value of the next edge with the same polarity.
2.
Frequency: defined as the reciprocal of period.
3.
Rise Time: the time for the signal amplitude to rise from the threshold lower limit to the threshold upper limit of the rising edge.
4.
Fall Time: the time for the signal amplitude to fall from the threshold upper limit to the threshold lower limit of the falling edge.
5.
+ Width: the time difference between the threshold middle value of a rising edge and the threshold middle value of the next falling edge of the pulse.
6.
- Width: the time difference between the threshold middle value of a falling edge and the threshold middle value of the next rising edge of the pulse.
7.
+ Duty: the ratio of the positive pulse width to the period.
8.
- Duty: the ratio of the negative pulse width to the period.
Note: The default values of the threshold upper limit, threshold middle value and threshold lower limit in the figure above are 90%, 50% and 10% respectively. You can set them via Measure Setting Type “Threshold” and for the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “Threshold Measurement Setting”.
6-18
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Delay and Phase
Period
Source A
RIGOL
Delay
Source B
Figure 6-4 Delay and Phase
Source A and source B can be CH1, CH2 or any of D0 to D15. You can set them via
Measure Setting Type “Delay” (“Phase”). For the setting method, refer to
“Measurement Setting”.
1.
Dly A → B : the time difference between the threshold middle values of the rising edges of source A and source B.
2.
Dly A
→
B : the time difference between the threshold middle values of the falling edges of source A and source B.
3.
Dly A
→
B : the time difference between the threshold middle values of the rising edge of source A and the falling edge of source B.
4.
Dly A
→
B : the time difference between the threshold middle values of the falling edge of source A and the rising edge of source B.
5.
Phs A
→
B : the phase difference between the threshold middle values of the rising edges of source A and source B. It can be calculated according to Dly
A
→
B and the period of source A.
6.
Phs A → B : the phase difference between the threshold middle values of the falling edges of source A and source B. It can be calculated according to Dly
A → B and the period of source A.
7.
Phs A
→
B : the phase difference between the threshold middle values of the rising edge of source A and the falling edge of source B. It can be calculated according to Dly A
→
B and the period of source A.
8.
Phs A → B : the phase difference between the threshold middle values of the falling edge of source A and the rising edge of source B. It can be calculated according to Dly A → B and the period of source A.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-19 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Note:
Negative delay value/negative phase value indicates that the edge selected of source A occurred after the edge selected of source B.
Phase is expressed in degree and the calculation formula is as shown below.
Phase
=
Delay
PeriodA
× 360 °
Wherein,
Phase
is the phase measurement result;
Delay
is the delay measurement result;
PeriodA
is the period of source A.
6-20
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
Voltage Parameters
Vmax
Overshoot
Vtop
Vpp
Vamp
Vbase
Vmin
Preshoot
Figure 6-5 Voltage Parameters
1.
Vmax: the voltage value from the highest point of the waveform to the GND.
2.
Vmin: the voltage value from the lowest point of the waveform to the GND.
3.
Vpp: the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the waveform.
4.
Vtop: the voltage value from the flat top of the waveform to the GND.
5.
Vbase: the voltage value from the flat base of the waveform to the GND.
6.
Vamp: the difference between the top value and the base value of the waveform.
7.
Vavg: the arithmetic average value of the voltage values of the waveform points
(relative to the GND). The calculation formula is as shown below.
Average
=
∑
n i = 1
x
i
n
Wherein, x i
is the measurement result of the i th point being measured; n is the total number of points being measured.
8.
Vrms-N: the root mean square value of the voltage values of the waveform points (relative to the GND). The calculation formula is as shown below.
RMS
=
∑
i n
= 1
x
i
2
n
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-21 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Wherein, x i
is the measurement result of the i th point being measured; n
is the total number of points being measured.
9.
Vrms-1: the root mean square value of the voltage values of the waveform points (relative to the GND) within a single period. The calculation formula is as shown above.
10.
Overshoot: the ratio of the difference of the maximum value and top value of the waveform to the amplitude value.
11.
Preshoot: the ratio of the difference of the minimum value and base value of the waveform to the amplitude value.
Area Parameters
1.
Area: the horizontal axis denotes time and the vertical axis denotes waveform amplitude. The oscilloscope calculates the area of the waveform (namely the integral of the time and amplitude). The unit is volt-second. The area of the waveform above the zero reference (namely the vertical offset) is positive and the area of the waveform below the zero reference is negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the area of the waveform within the current measurement range.
2.
Per.Area: period area; the horizontal axis denotes time and the vertical axis denotes waveform amplitude. The oscilloscope calculates the area of the waveform (namely the integral of the time and amplitude) within a single period.
The unit is volt-second. The area of the waveform above the zero reference
(namely the vertical offset) is positive and the area of the waveform below the zero reference is negative. The area measured is the algebraic sum of the area of the waveform within a single period.
6-22
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
Frequency Counter Measurement
The hardware frequency counter supplied with MSO2000A/DS2000A oscilloscope can make more precise measurement of the input signal frequency.
Press Measure Counter to select CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15 as the measurement source. Besides, the signal input from the [EXT TRIG] connector can also be used as measurement source. The measurement result is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen and you can identify the current measurement source according to the color of the icon. The following figure is the result of frequency measurement of the input signal of CH1.
Select “OFF” to disable the frequency counter measurement function.
Note: When the frequency of the input signal of the measurement source is lower than 15 Hz, the measurement result displayed is “< 15 Hz”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-23 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Measurement Setting
1.
Source Selection
Press Measure Source to select the source channel (CH1, CH2, MATH or any channel of D0-D15) of the time, voltage or area parameter. The color of the parameter icons under MENU at the left of the screen will change with the source selected.
2.
Measurement Range
Press Measure Range Range to select “Screen” or “Cursor” for measurement.
When “Cursor” is selected, two cursor lines appear on the screen. At this point, press CursorA and CursorB and use to adjust the position of the two cursor lines respectively so as to determine the measurement range. Or, press
CursorAB and use to adjust the positions of cursor A and cursor B at the same time.
Note: You can press continuously to switch among CursorA, CursorB and
CursorAB.
Figure 6-6 Cursor Region
3.
Delayed Measurement Setting
Specify source A and source B in the measurement items “Dly A
→
B ”, “Dly
A → B ”, “Dly A → B ” and “Dly A → B ”.
Press Measure Setting Type “Delay” and then press SourceA and
SourceB to set the two channel sources (CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15) of delayed measurement respectively.
Note: When SourceA is set to any analog channel (or digital channel),
6-24
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
SourceB can only be set to an analog channel (or digital channel).
4.
Phase Measurement Setting
Specify source A and source B in the measurement items “Phs A → B ”, “Phs
A → B ”, “Phs A → B ” and “Phs A → B ”.
Press Measure Setting Type “Phase” and then press SourceA and
SourceB to set the two channel sources (CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15) of phase measurement respectively.
Note: When SourceA is set to any analog channel (or digital channel),
SourceB can only be set to an analog channel (or digital channel).
5.
Threshold Measurement Setting
Specify the upper limit, lower limit and middle value of the auto measurement of the analog channel. Measurements of all the time, delay and phase parameters will be influenced by this setting.
Press Measure Setting Type “Threshold” and then:
Press Max and use to set the maximum value of the measurement.
Reducing the maximum value to the current “Mid” will automatically reduce
“Mid” (“Min” might also be included) to keep it (them) lower than the maximum value. The default is 90% and the range available is from 7% to
95%.
Press Mid and use to set the middle value of measurement. The middle value is limited by the settings of “Max” and “Min”. The default is 50% and the range available is from 6% to 94%.
Press Min and use to set the minimum value of the measurement.
Increasing the minimum value to the current “Mid” will automatically increase “Mid” (“Max” might also be included) to keep it (them) higher than the minimum value. The default is 10% and the range available is from 5% to 93%.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-25 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
To Clear the Measurement
If you have currently enabled one or more items in the 29 measurement parameters, you can “Delete” or “Recover” the last five parameters or “Delete” or “Recover” all the measurement items enabled.
Note: The last five parameters are determined according to the order in which you turned them on and they will not change as you delete one or more measurement items.
Press Measure Clear Item n (n=1~5) to “Delete” or “Recover” the specified measurement item. When one measurement item is deleted or recovered, the measurement result at the bottom of the screen will move one-item left or right.
Press Measure Clear All Items to “Delete” or “Recover” the last five parameters.
Note: Press and hold Measure to quickly clear or restore the last five parameters.
6-26
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
All Measurement
All measurement could measure all the time and voltage parameters (each measurement source has 21 items, measurements can be performed on CH1, CH2 and MATH at the same time) of the current measurement source and display the results on the screen. Press Measure Display All to enable or disable the all measurement function. Press Measure Source and use to select the channel(s) to be measured (CH1, CH2 and MATH).
When multiple “All Measurement” source channels are selected at the same time, the measurement results (the measurement results are in the same color as the channel) will be displayed on the screen from top to bottom in CH1, CH2, and MATH order. If the measurement result is displayed as “*****”, there is no signal input into the current measurement source or the measurement result is out of the valid range (too large or too small).
Note:
When the all measurement function is enabled, “One-key Measurement” is still valid.
“To Clear the Measurement” will not clear the measurement results of the all measurement function.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-27 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Statistic Function
Make statistic and display the current, average, minimum (or standard deviation) and maximum (or count) values of at most 5 measurement items that are turned on last.
Press Measure Statistic to turn the statistic function on or off. When the statistic function is enabled, press Mode to select “Extremum” or “Difference” measurement. When “Extremum” is selected, the current value, average value, minimum value and maximum value are displayed at the lower side of the screen.
When “Difference” is selected, the current value, average value, standard deviation and count value are displayed at the lower side of the screen. Besides, you can press
Reset to clear the history data and make statistic again.
Measurement History
To view the history measurement data, press Measure History History
“ON”. Press Display to select the history data display mode.
Graph: display the measurement results of at most 5 measurement items that are turned on last in graph mode. The measurement points are connected using linear interpolation.
Table: display the results of the last 10 measurements of at most 5 measurement items that are turned on last in table mode.
6-28
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
Cursor Measurement
Before making cursor measurements, connect the signal to the oscilloscope and acquire stable display. Cursor measurement can measure the X axis values (usually
Time) and Y axis values (usually Voltage) of the selected waveform. All the parameters supported by the “Auto Measurement” function can also be measured through cursors.
The cursor measurement function provides the following two kinds of cursors.
X Cursor (Cursor A) X Cursor (Cursor B)
Y Cursor
(Cursor A)
Y Cursor
(Cursor B)
X Cursor
X cursor is a vertical solid/dotted line used to perform horizontal adjustment. It can be used to measure time (s), frequency (Hz), phase (°) and ratio (%).
― Cursor A is a vertical solid line and cursor B is a vertical dotted line.
― In the X-Y cursor mode, X cursor is used to measure the waveform amplitude of CH1.
Y Cursor
Y cursor is a horizontal solid/dotted line used to perform vertical adjustment. It can be used to measure amplitude (the unit is the same as that of the source channel amplitude) and ratio (%).
― Cursor A is a horizontal solid line and cursor B is a horizontal dotted line.
― In the X-Y cursor mode, Y cursor is used to measure the waveform amplitude of CH2.
Press Cursor (in the function menu at the front panel) Mode; use to select the desired cursor mode (the default is “OFF”) and then press down the knob. You can also press Cursor or Mode continuously to switch the current cursor mode. The
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-29 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements modes available are “Manual”, “Track”, “Auto” and “X-Y”. When “OFF” is selected, the cursor measurement function is turned off. When the “Time Base Mode” is “X-Y”, only X-Y cursor mode is available.
Manual Mode
In this mode, you can adjust the cursors manually to measure the X value (or Y value), X increment (or Y increment) between cursors and the reciprocal of X increment on the waveform of the selected source (CH1, CH2 or MATH). When the measurement source is set to LA, the logic level value of the digital channel currently turned on will be displayed in binary and hexadecimal forms (high level is 1 and low level is 0).
Press Cursor Mode “Manual” to turn the manual cursor measurement function on. The measurement results are displayed at the upper left corner of the screen. You can also press Cursor or Mode continuously to switch to “Manual”.
When the measurement parameters are modified, the measurement results will change accordingly.
When the measurement source is CH1, CH2 or MATH, the measurement results are as shown in the figure below.
A->X: the X value at cursor A. X value takes the trigger position as reference. Its unit is “s” or “Hz” (when measuring FFT waveform).
B->X: the X value at cursor B. X value takes the trigger position as reference. Its unit is “s” or “Hz” (when measuring FFT waveform).
A->Y: the Y value at cursor A. Y value takes the channel GND as reference. Its unit is the same as that of the current signal source.
B->Y: the Y value at cursor B. Y value takes the channel GND as reference. Its unit is the same as that of the current signal source.
6-30
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
△ X: the horizontal difference between cursor A and B.
1/ △ X: the reciprocal of the horizontal difference between cursor A and B.
△ Y: the vertical difference between cursor A and B.
Note: The display mode of the measurement results displayed at the upper left corner of the screen will be different in different cursor display mode, measurement source and units currently selected. When the vertical unit is set to “Source Unit”:
In X (or Y) display mode, A->Y, B->Y and △ Y (or A->X, B->X, △ X and 1/ △ X) will not be displayed.
When the measurement source is MATH (FFT), the units of A->Y and B->Y are
“dBV” and the unit of △ Y is “dB”.
When different horizontal unit is selected, the unit of A->X, B->X, △ X and 1/ △ X is different (for the details, please refer to the introduction below). When the horizontal unit is set to “°” or “%”, 1/ △ X will not be displayed.
When the measurement source is set to LA, the display mode will be set to X automatically and the measurement results will be displayed in the following form.
CurA: the X value at cursor A. X value takes the trigger position as reference.
D15D0: display the logic level values at cursor A (D15-D0 from left to right) in hexadecimal and binary forms. If the digital channel is currently turned off, it will be denoted by X in the binary data.
CurB: the X value at cursor B. X value takes the trigger position as reference.
D15D0: display the logic level values at cursor B (D15-D0 from left to right) in hexadecimal and binary forms. If the digital channel is currently turned off, it will be denoted by X in the binary data.
△ X: the horizontal distance between cursor A and cursor B.
1.
Select Display Mode
Press DisplayMode to select “X”, “Y” or “X-Y”.
The X cursors are a pair of vertical solid/dotted lines and are usually used to measure time parameters.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-31 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
The Y cursors are a pair of horizontal solid/dotted lines and are usually used to measure voltage parameters.
The X-Y cursors are a pair of vertical solid/dotted lines and a pair of horizontal solid/dotted lines and are usually used to measure time and voltage parameters at the same time.
Note: When the current measurement source is LA, the cursor type is “X” and cannot be set.
2.
Select Measurement Source
Press Source to select the waveform of the analog channels (CH1 or CH2), math operation results (MATH) or LA waveform for measurement. If “None” is selected, no cursor will be displayed.
Note: For CH1, CH2, MATH and LA, only channel currently enabled can be selected.
3.
Select Screen Region
When Zoom is enabled (pressing the HORIZONTAL SCALE can enables Zoom), the screen is divided into two regions, Main and Zoom.
Press Screen to select “Main” or “Zoom”. When “Main” is selected, the cursors are displayed in the main region and measure the signal displayed in the main region. The measurement results are displayed in the zoom region. When “Zoom” is selected, the cursors are displayed in the zoom region and measure the signal displayed in the zoom region. The measurement results are displayed in the main region.
Note: When the current measurement source is LA or MATH, only the parameters in the Zoom region can be measured.
When Zoom is disabled, “Main” is automatically selected in Screen and cannot be modified.
4.
Select X (Y) Axis Unit
When the measurement source is “CH1”, “CH2” or “MATH”
When the display mode is “X” or “X-Y”, press Time Unit to select “s”, “Hz”, “°” or
“%”.
s: in the measurement results, A->X, B->X and △ X denote time and 1/ △ X denotes frequency.
Hz: in the measurement results, A->X, B->X and △ X denote frequency and
1/ △ X denotes time.
6-32
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
°: in the measurement results, A->X, B->X and △ X are expressed in degree.
At this point, A->X, B->X and △ X will change to “0°”, “360°” and “360°” respectively when you press SetCursor, no matter where cursor A and cursor B are currently located. At the same time, two cursor lines
(unmovable) appear on the screen as the reference positions.
%: in the measurement results, A->X, B->X and △ X are expressed in percentage.
At this point, A->X, B->X and △ X will change to “0%”, “100%” and “100%” respectively when you press SetCursor, no matter where cursor A and B are currently located. At the same time, two cursor lines (unmovable) appear on the screen as the reference positions.
Note: When the display mode is set to “Y”, the Time Unit menu will be hidden automatically and cannot be set.
When the display mode is “Y” or “X-Y”, press Vertical Unit to select “Source
Unit” or “%”.
Source Unit: when this unit is selected, in the measurement results, the units of A->Y, B->Y and △ Y will be automatically set to the unit of the current source.
%: when this unit is selected, in the measurement results, A->Y, B->Y and
△ X are expressed in percentage. At this point, A->Y, B->Y and △ X will change to “0%”, “100%” and “100%” respectively when you press
SetCursor, no matter where cursor A and B are currently located. At the same time, two cursor lines (unmovable) appear on the screen as the reference positions.
Note: When the display mode is set to “X” or the measurement source is set to
LA, the Vertical Unit menu will be hidden automatically and cannot be set.
When the measurement source is “LA”
When the measurement source is “LA”, DisplayMode is set to “X” automatically and cannot be changed; you can only set the X axis unit. Press Time Unit softkey to select “s”, “Hz”, “°” or “%”.
s: in the measurement results, CurA, CurB and △ X denote time.
Hz: in the measurement results, CurA, CurB and △ X denote frequency.
°: in the measurement results, CurA, CurB and △ X are expressed in degree.
For the description and setting method of phase reference position, please refer to the related introduction above.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-33 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
%: in the measurement results, CurA, CurB and △ X are expressed in percentage.
For the description and setting method of ratio reference position, please refer to the related introduction above.
5.
Adjust the Cursor Position
Adjust the horizontal positions of the cursors:
When the display mode is “X” or “X-Y” (press SelectCursor to select “X”) mode, press CursorA and CursorB and use to adjust the horizontal positions of cursor A and cursor B respectively. Press CursorAB and use to adjust the horizontal positions of cursor A and B at the same time. During the adjustment, the measurement result will change accordingly. The adjustable range is limited within the screen.
Adjust the vertical positions of the cursors:
When the display mode is “Y” or “X-Y” (press SelectCursor to select “Y”) mode, press CursorA and CursorB and use to adjust the vertical positions of cursor A and cursor B respectively. Press CursorAB and use to adjust the vertical positions of cursor A and B at the same time. During the adjustment, the measurement result will change accordingly. The adjustable range is limited within the screen.
6.
Measurement Example
Use manual cursor measurement to measure the period ( △ X) and frequency
(1/ △ X) of a sine waveform and the results are equal to the results from auto measurement.
Cursor
Measurement
Auto
Measurement
Figure 6-7 Manual Cursor Measurement
6-34
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
Track Mode
In this mode, you can adjust the two cursors (cursor A and cursor B) to measure the
X and Y values on two different sources respectively. The points being measured on cursor A and B are marked by an orange rectangle and rhombus respectively. When the cursors are moved horizontally, the marks will position on the waveform automatically. When the waveform is expanded or compressed horizontally, the marks will track the points being marked at the last adjustment of the cursors.
Press Cursor Mode “Track” to turn on the cursor track function and the measurement results will be displayed at the upper left corner of the screen in the following mode. You can also press MENU or Mode continuously to switch to
“Track”. When the measurement parameters are modified, the measurement results will change accordingly.
A->X: the X value at cursor A. The X value takes the trigger position as reference and “s” or “Hz” (when measuring FFT waveform) as its unit.
A->Y: the Y value at cursor A. The Y value takes the channel GND as reference and use the same unit as the current source.
B->X: the X value at cursor B. The X value takes the trigger position as reference and “s” or “Hz” (when measuring FFT waveform) as its unit.
B->Y: the Y value at cursor B. The Y value takes the channel GND as reference and use the same unit as the current source.
△ X: the horizontal difference between cursor A and B.
1/ △ X: the reciprocal of the horizontal difference between cursor A and B.
△ Y: the vertical difference between cursor A and B.
1.
Select Measurement Source
Press Cursor A or Cursor B to select the waveform of analog channels (CH1 or
CH2) or math operation results (MATH) as the measurement source of cursor A
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-35 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements or cursor B (only channels enabled are available). You can also select “None”, namely do not use cursor A or cursor B.
2.
Adjust Cursor Position
Adjust cursor A: press CursorA and use to adjust the position of cursor
A. During the adjustment, the measurement result will change accordingly.
The adjustable range is limited within the screen.
Adjust cursor B: press CursorB and use to adjust the position of cursor
B. During the adjustment, the measurement result will change accordingly.
The adjustable range is limited within the screen.
Adjust cursor A and B at the same time: press CursorAB and use to adjust the position of cursor A and B at the same time. During the adjustment, the measurement results will change accordingly. The adjustable range is limited within the screen.
Note:
Under the current menu, you can press continuously to select CursorA,
CursorB and CursorAB.
When “None” is selected as the measurement source of cursor A (or cursor
B), CursorA (or CursorB) and CursorAB will be grayed out.
In track mode, the cursor will track the marked point (namely jumps up and down with the transient change of the waveform). Thus, the Y value might change even though you do not adjust the cursor.
3.
Measurement Example
Use cursor A and B to measure the waveforms of CH1 and CH2 respectively. You would discover that the cursors would track the marked points when the waveforms are expanded or compressed horizontally, as shown in the figures on the next page.
6-36
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Track Measurement (Before Horizontal Expansion):
RIGOL
Track Measurement (After Horizontal Expansion):
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-37 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
Auto Mode
In this mode, one or more cursors will appear. You can use auto cursor measurement to measure any of the 29 waveform parameters. Before using this mode, you need to at least enable one auto measurement parameter and the number of cursors will change with the measurement parameter enabled.
Press Cursor Mode “Auto” and the number of cursors displayed on the screen is determined by the measurement parameter enabled (different measurement parameter needs different number of cursors).
Note: No cursor will be displayed if no auto cursor measurement parameter is enabled or the measurement source has no input. When the waveform is expanded or compressed horizontally, the cursor will move accordingly.
If multiple measurement parameters are turned on later, you can use Meas.Para. to switch among at most five measurement parameters that are turned on last and the measurement parameter currently selected is high-lighted at the bottom of the screen.
The following figure shows the auto measurement of the period of CH1.
6-38
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements RIGOL
X-Y Mode
X-Y mode is only available when the main time base is “X-Y” mode. In this mode, you can adjust the cursor to measure X and Y values of the crossing points of the two pairs of cursors.
Press MENU at the horizontal control are (HORIZONTAL) at the front panel and then press Time Base to select “X-Y”. Press Cursor Mode “X-Y” to enable the X-Y mode cursor measurement function. You can also press MENU or Mode continuously to switch to “X-Y”. The measurement results are displayed at the upper left corner of the screen in the following mode.
CurAX: the X value at cursor A.
CurBX: the X value at cursor B.
CurAY: the Y value at cursor A.
CurBY: the Y value at cursor B.
You can adjust the positions of the cursors by the following instructions.
Press Type to select “X”. Then, press CursorA and CursorB and use to adjust the horizontal positions of cursor A and cursor B respectively. Press CursorAB and use to adjust the horizontal position of cursor A and B at the same time. During the adjustment, the measurement result will change accordingly. The adjustable range is limited within the screen.
Press Type to select “Y”. Then, press CursorA and CursorB and use to adjust the vertical positions of cursor A and cursor B respectively. Press CursorAB and use
to adjust the vertical positions of cursor A and cursor B at the same time. During the adjustment, the measurement result will change accordingly. The adjustable range is limited within the screen.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
6-39 [email protected]
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 7 Digital Channel RIGOL
Chapter 7 Digital Channel
MSO2000A series mixed signal digital oscilloscope provides 2 analog channels as well as 16 digital channels. For the digital channels, the oscilloscope compares the voltages acquired in each sample with the preset logic threshold. If the voltage of the sample point is greater than the logic threshold, it will be stored as logic 1; otherwise, it will be stored as logic 0. The oscilloscope displays the logic 1 and logic 0 in figure form for users to easily detect and analyze the errors in the circuit design (hardware design and software design). This chapter introduces how to use the digital channels of MSO2000A mixed signal digital oscilloscope.
Before using the digital channels, connect the oscilloscope and the device under test using RPL2316 logic probe provided in the accessories. For the using method of the logic probe, refer to the
RPL2316 Logic Probe User’s Guide
.
The contents of this chapter:
To Select the Digital Channel
To Move the Digital Channel
To Turn on/off the Digital Channel
Group Set
To Set the Waveform Display Size
Reorder Setting
To Set the Threshold
To Use the Digital Bus
To Set the Label
Digital Channel Delay Calibration
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 7 Digital Channel
To Select the Digital Channel
Press LA CH/Group, rotate the multifunction knob to select any of the digital channels or user-defined digital channel groups. You can also press
CH/Group continuously or to switch among the options in order.
D0-D15: select any channel of D0-D15. The channel label and waveform corresponding to the channel selected are displayed in red.
Group1-Group4: select any of the user-defined groups Group1-Group4. The channels labels of all the channels of the channel group selected are displayed in red and the waveform of the first channel of the channel group selected is displayed in red.
None: do not select any channel or channel group.
Note: Only digital channel or user-defined groups that are turned on can be selected.
For how to turn on the digital channel/group, please refer to the introduction in “To
Turn on/off the Digital Channel”.
For how to define channel group, please refer to the introduction in “Group Set”.
To Move the Digital Channel
Press LA and rotate to move the channel/group currently selected to the desired position.
Note: When any of the user-defined channel groups Group1-Group4 is currently selected, all the channels in the group will move when you rotate .
7-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 7 Digital Channel RIGOL
To Turn on/off the Digital Channel
Press LA On/Off to enter the digital channel/group “On/Off” setting menu.
Press D7-D0 to turn on or off channels D7-D0 at the same time.
Press D15-D8 to turn on or off channels D15-D8 at the same time.
Press Sel CH to turn on the channel list. Rotate to select any channel and press to turn on or off the channel. You can also press Sel CH continuously to turn on or off the selected channel. Channels turned on are marked with and channels that are not turned on are marked with . You can turn on or off any channel via the channel selection menu.
Note: When you have turned off channels D7-D0 at the same time using
D7-D0, you can still turn on or off any of the channels via the channel selection menu. When you have turned on channels D7-D0 at the same time using
D7-D0, the channels in the list switch to ON status automatically. The situation of channels D15-D8 is similar.
Press Group, rotate to select any channel group and press to turn on or off all the channels in the group at the same time. You can also press Group continuously to turn on or off the selected group. The channel groups turned on are marked with and the channel groups that are not turned on are marked with .
Note: Only user-defined digital channel groups can be selected.
For how to define channel groups, please refer to the introduction in “Group
Set”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 7 Digital Channel
Group Set
Press LA Group Set to enter the user-defined group setting menu. You can perform group and ungroup operations on the 16 digital channels.
Group:
The group operations of Group1-Group4 are the same and Group1 is taken asaneaxample for illustration.
Press Group1 to turn on the channel list (the status label is located at the left side of each channel), rotate to select the channel to be added into Group1 and press or Group1 to add the channel selected to Group1. Channels added into Group1 are marked with and channels that are not added into
Group1 is marked with .
Use the same method to group the other channels. Each channel can only be added into a single group and channels that are already added into other group cannot be selected (its status label is gray).
Ungroup:
Press UnGroup to open the channel/group list and rotate to select the desired channel/group. If any channel of D0-D15 is selected, pressing will cancel the group operation of the channel; if any of Group1-Group4 is selected, pressing will cancel the group operations of all the channels in the group.
Note: You can only perform the ungroup operation on the grouped digital channels or digital channel groups. If none group is set, UnGroup will be grayed out and disabled.
7-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 7 Digital Channel RIGOL
To Set the Waveform Display Size
Press LA WaveSize, rotate to select the desired display size and the press down . You can also press WaveSize continuously to switch among S (small), M
(medium) and L (large).
Note: L (large) can only be used when the number of channels currently turned on is no more than 8.
Reorder Setting
Press LA ReOrder to select the waveform order mode on the screen of the channels currently selected. You can select “D0-D15” or “D15-D0” and the default is
“D0-D15”.
D0-D15: the waveforms on the screen are D0-D15 from top to bottom.
D15-D0: the waveforms on the screen are D15-D0 from top to bottom.
To Set the Threshold
Press LA Threshold to enter the threshold setting menu. The threshold levels of channels D7-D0 and channels D15-D8 can be set separately. When the voltage of the input signal is greater than the threshold currently set, it is treated as logic 1; otherwise, it is treated as logic 0.
Press Type to open the threshold type selection list to select a preset value or user.
The preset values include TTL, 5.0V CMOS, 3.3V CMOS, 2.5V CMOS, 1.8V CMOS,
ECL, PECL, LVDS and 0V. After selecting a preset value, press AppToD7-D0 to apply the threshold level to channels D7-D0 and press AppToD15-D8 to apply the threshold level to channels D15-D8.
When “User Def” is selected, press D7-D0 and D15-D8 and use to set the desired thresholds respectively. The range is from -20.0 V to +20.0 V.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 7 Digital Channel
To Use the Digital Bus
Users can display the three groups of channels (D7-D0, D15-D8 and D15-D0) as digital buses according to their needs. Each bus value will be displayed at the bottom of the screen in data or graph form. You can create up to 2 buses.
Press LA Bus to enter the digital bus setting menu.
Press Bus to select “BUS1” or “BUS2”.
Press BusStatus to turn on or off the digital bus.
Press Sel CH to set the corresponding channels of BUS1 or BUS2 to D7-D0,
D15-D8 or D15-D0.
Press Endian to set the bus endian to “Normal (D0 locates at the least significant bit)” or “Invert (D0 locates at the most significant bit)” and the default is “Normal”.
Press RefClock to select any channel of D0-D15 or CH1-CH2 as the reference clock of the bus. Selecting “None” means no reference clock will be used.
When CH1 or CH2 is selected to be the reference clock, you can press
Threshold and rotate the multifunction knob to set the threshold of the clock channel, the range is from (-4*vertical scale - vertical position) to
(4*vertical scale - vertical position). Pressing down can quickly reset the threshold level of the clock channel to 0 V. When any channel of D0-D15 is selected to be the reference clock, Threshold will be hidden automatically and the threshold cannot be set.
Press Slope to set the sample edge type of the reference clock to (rising edge) or (falling edge).
Press Type to set the display mode of the digital bus to “Data” or “Graph”. In data mode, the bus data is displayed; in graph mode, the oscilloscope displays the level of the corresponding value of the bus data for easier observation of the variation tendency of the bus values.
Press Format to set the display format of the digital bus to Hex, Decimal, Binary or ASCII.
Press Jitter Reject to turn on the jitter rejection function. Jitter refers to the short-term deviation of the signal relative to its ideal time position at certain time point, as shown as T1 and T2 in Figure 7-1. When no reference clock is selected for the bus, the jump status of each channel would cause the variation of the bus data and undesired data would be generated due to jitter when the
7-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 7 Digital Channel RIGOL bus data varies. When the jitter rejection is turned on, the bus does not display the variation of the bus data caused by certain jitter time and still holds the effective data.
Press Jitter Time and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the jitter time at a relatively smaller step or use the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the jitter time at a relatively larger step. The range is from 1 ns to 1 ms.
Note: Jitter rejection and jitter time can be set only when no reference clock is selected.
Signal
Ideal Clock
Figure 7-1 Digital Bus Jitter
To Set the Label
Press LA Label to set a user-defined label for specified digital channel.
Use preset labels
Press Sel CH to select the digital channel (any channel of D0-D15) that needs to set a label.
Press Preset and rotate to select a desired label. The available labels include ACK, AD0, ADDR, BIT, CAS, CLK, DATA, HALT, INT, UB, LOAD, NMI, OUT,
PIN, RAS, RDY, RST, RX, TX and WR.
Input a label manually
Press Sel CH to select the digital channel (any channel of D0-D15) that needs to set a label.
Press Input to enter the label input interface to input a label manually. For the input method, refer to the introduction in “ Channel Label”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 7 Digital Channel
Digital Channel Delay Calibration
When using the oscilloscope for actual measurement, the transmission delay of the probe cable may cause relatively larger error (zero offset). Zero offset is defined as the offset of the crossing point of the waveform and threshold level line relative to the trigger position. For MSO2000A, users can set a delay time to calibrate the zero offset of the digital channels.
Press LA Delay-Cal and rotate to set the delay calibration time. The range is from -100 ns to 100 ns.
Note: This parameter is related to the instrument model and the current horizontal time base. The larger the horizontal time base is, the larger the setting step will be.
Take MSO2302A as an example, when the horizontal time base is 50 ns, the step is 1 ns; when the horizontal time base is 2 μs, the step is 40 ns; when the horizontal time base is greater than or equal to 10 μs, the delay calibration time cannot be adjusted.
7-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
Protocol analysis can be used by users to discover errors, debug hardware and accelerate development easily, so as to guarantee quick and high-quality accomplishment of projects. Protocol decoding is the basis of protocol analysis. Only protocol analyses with correct protocol decoding are acceptable and only correct protocol decoding can provide more error information. MSO2000A/DS2000A provides two buses to make common protocol decoding (including Parallel (standard),
RS232 (option), I2C (option), SPI (option) and CAN (option)) of the analog channels
(CH1 or CH2) and digital channels (D0-D15). As the decoding functions and setting methods of the two buses are the same, this chapter only takes Decode1 for illustration.
To get the decoding option information, please refer to the introduction in
“Appendix A: Accessories and Options”.
When you have ordered the decoding option, please refer to the introduction in
“Option Management” to activate corresponding option.
The contents of this chapter:
Parallel Decoding
RS232 Decoding (Option)
I2C Decoding (Option)
SPI Decoding (Option)
CAN Decoding (Option)
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
Parallel Decoding
Parallel bus consists of clock line and data line. As shown in the figure below, CLK is the clock line, while Bit0 and Bit1 are the 0 bit and 1st bit on the data line respectively.
The oscilloscope will sample the channel data on the rising edge, falling edge or the rising/falling edge of the clock and judge each data point (logic “1” or logic “0”) according to the preset threshold level.
Figure 8-1 Parallel Decoding
Press Decode1 Decode to select “Parallel” and open the parallel decoding function menu.
1.
Clock Line Setting (CLK)
Press CLKChannel to select any channel (CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15) as the clock channel. If “None” is selected, no clock channel is set.
Press Slope to set the oscilloscope to sample the channel data on the rising edge ( ), falling edge ( ) or rising/falling edges ( ). If no clock channel is selected, the instrument will sample when the channel data jumps during the decoding.
2.
Data Line Setting
Set the bus bits
Press Bus Bits to set the data width of the parallel bus namely the number of bits per frame. The default is 8 and the maximum is 18 bits (Bit0,
Bit1…Bit17).
Specify data channel for each bit.
First, press CurrentBit to select the bit that needs to specify channel. The
8-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding RIGOL default is 0 and the range available is from 0 to (the bus bits-1). For example, when the bus bits is 18, the range available is 0, 1…17.
Next, press Channel to specify a channel source for the bit currently selected in CurrentBit. The channel source can be CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15.
3.
Analog Channel Threshold Setting
Press Threshold to open the threshold setting menu.
Press Channel to select the desired channel (CH1 or CH2).
Press TTL, CMOS or ECL to set the threshold of the specified channel to the corresponding level value; or press Threshold and use to set the threshold. The settable range is from (-5*vertical scale - vertical position) to
(5*vertical scale - vertical position). The default is 0 V. Pressing down can quickly reset the threshold level to 0 V.
Note: When the threshold selected is beyond the specified range, it will be automatically limited within the range.
4.
Display-related Setting
Press Format to set the display format of the bus to Hex, Decimal, Binary or
ASCII.
Press Offset and use to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
Press BusStatus to turn the bus display on or off.
5.
Event Table
The event table displays the decoded data and the corresponding line number and time in table format. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded data. Press Event Table Event Table to select “ON” (This operation is only available when BusStatus is set to “ON”) to enter the event table interface as shown in Figure 8-2.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
Figure 8-2 Parallel Event Table
At this point, “Table” is selected in the View menu automatically and the menu is grayed out. The decoded data is displayed in table format following the time order. If an USB storage device is currently connected to the instrument, press
Export to export the data table to the external USB storage device in CSV format.
8-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
RS232 Decoding (Option)
RS232 serial bus consists of the transmitting data line (TX) and the receiving data line (RX).
The industry standard of RS232 uses “Negative Logic”, namely high level is logic “0” and low level is logic “1”.
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1
Figure 8-3 RS232 Industrial Standard Schematic Diagram
By default, RS232 uses LSB (Least Significant Bit) transmission sequence, namely the lowest bit of the data is transmitted first. While for MSB (Most Significant Bit), the highest bit of the data is transmitted first. t t
Endian (LSB) Endian (MSB)
In RS232, you need to set the start bit, data bits, check bit (optional) and stop bit of each frame of data.
Start Bit: represent when the data starts outputting.
Data Bits: represent the number of data bits actually contained in each frame of data.
Check Bit: used to check the correctness of the data transmission.
Odd Checkout: the total number of “1” in the data bit and check bit is an odd.
For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, a 1 needs to be filled in the check bit to make the number of 1 be an odd.
Even Checkout: the total number of “1” in the data bit and check bit is an even.
For example, when 0x55 (01010101) is sent, a 0 should be filled in the check bit.
None: there would not be check bit during the transmission.
Stop Bit: represent when the data stops outputting.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
Press Decode1 Decode to select “RS232” to open the RS232 decoding function menu.
If the current trigger type of the trigger system is RS232, pressing CopyTrig can copy the current RS232 trigger settings (include the source channel, polarity, stop bit, even-odd check mode, data bits and baud rate) and apply them to the RS232 decoding function. Then, if needed, you can still set the RS232 decoding parameters according to the introductions below.
Note: The copy function is only available when the current trigger type is “RS232”; otherwise, CopyTrig is not available.
1.
TX and RX Channel Setting
Press TX to select any channel (CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15) as the transmitting channel and when “None” is selected, no transmitting channel is set.
Use the same method the set the RX channel.
When an analog channel is selected for TX or RX, you need to set a threshold by pressing the TX or RX menu. The range is from (-5*vertical scale - vertical position) to (5*vertical scale - vertical position) and the default is 0 V.
2.
Polarity Setting
Press Polarity to select “Normal” (negative logic, namely the high level is logic
“0” and the low level is logic “1”) or “Invert” (positive logic, namely the high level is logic “1” and the low level is logic “0”) and the default is “Normal”.
3.
Endian Setting
Press Endian to select “LSB” or “MSB” and the default is “LSB”.
4.
Baud Rate Setting
Press Baud to select the desired baud rate and the default is 9600 bps. If “User” is selected, press Setup and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the baud rate at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the baud rate at a relatively larger step. The range is from 110 bps to 20 Mbps.
5.
Data Packet Setting
As mentioned before, in RS232, you need to set the start bit, data bits, check bit
(optional) and stop bit of each frame of data. “Start Bit” is specified by the
8-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
“Polarity Setting”. The setting methods of other parameters are as follows.
Press Data Bits to set the data width of each frame. It can be set to 5, 6, 7,
8 or 9 and the default is 8.
Press Stop Bit to set the stop bit after each frame of data. It can be set to
1 bit, 1.5 bit or 2 bit.
Press Even-Odd to set the even-odd check mode of the data transmission.
It can be set to None, Odd or Even.
Press Packet to enable or disable the packet end. When packet end is enabled, several data blocks are combined according to the packet end.
Press PacketEnd to set the packet end during data transmission and it can be set to 00 (NULL), 0A (LF), 0D (CR), 20 (SP) or FF.
6.
Display-related Setting
Press Format to set the display format of the bus to Hex, Decimal, Binary or
ASCII.
Press Offset and use to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
Press BusStatus to turn the bus display on or off.
7.
Event Table
The event table displays the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time and error information on TX and/or RX data lines in table format. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded data.
Note: When the RX or TX channel is set to “None”, the information of this data line will not be displayed in the event table.
Press Event Table Event Table to select “ON” (This operation is only available when BusStatus is set to “ON”) to enter the event table interface as shown in the figure below.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
Figure 8-4 RS232 Event Table
At this point, “Table” is selected in the View menu automatically and the menu is grayed out. The event data is displayed in table format following the time order. If error occurs during the decoding, the corresponding error information is displayed. If a USB storage device is currently connected to the instrument, press Export to export the data table to the external USB storage device in CSV format.
8.
The Error Expression during Decoding
MSO2000A/DS2000A makes full use of the resources such as color and view to express the results of the protocol decoding effectively so as to let users find the desired information quickly.
End Frame Error:
Errors generated when the end frame condition is not met. When the stop bit is set to 1.5, red error mark ( Note: The red mark is displayed in different modes according to the horizontal time base setting; when the horizontal time base is relatively smaller, is displayed; otherwise, is displayed) will be displayed if the stop bit is less than 1.5.
Check Error:
When check bit error is detected during the decoding, red error mark will be
8-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding RIGOL displayed. For example, when the transmitting terminal is set to none check and the decoder is set to odd check, the following check error occurs.
(00000100 , LSB)
The check bit detected is 1
Wherein, there are odd number (1) of 1 in the 8-bit data 00000100 and the check bit should be 0; but the check bit detected on the TX is 1, thus check error occurs.
After the decoder is set to none check, the decoding becomes normal.
Note: Two error marks will be displayed when end frame error and check error are detected at the same time.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
I2C Decoding (Option)
I2C serial bus consists of the clock line (SCLK) and the data line (SDA).
SCLK: sample the SDA on the clock rising edge or falling edge.
SDA: denote the data channel.
SCLK
SDA
Figure 8-5 I2C Serial Bus
Press Decode1 Decode to select “I2C” and open the I2C decoding function menu.
If the current trigger type of the trigger system is I2C, pressing CopyTrig softkey can copy the current I2C trigger settings (include the clock signal and data signal) and apply them to the I2C decoding function. Then, if needed, you can still set the
I2C decoding parameters according to the introductions below.
Note: The copy function is only available when the current trigger type is “I2C”; otherwise, CopyTrig is not available.
1.
SCLK Setting
Press SCLK to select any channel (CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15) as the clock channel.
If the clock channel is set to CH1 or CH2, press SCLKThreshold to set the threshold of the clock channel. The range of the threshold is decided by the vertical position and scale, and is from (-5*vertical scale - vertical position) to
(5*vertical scale - vertical position). If the clock channel is set to any channel of
D0-D15, SCLKThreshold will be hidden automatically.
2.
SDA Setting
Press SDA to select any channel (CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15) as the data channel.
If the data channel is set to CH1 or CH2, press SDAThreshold to set the threshold of the data channel. The range of the threshold is decided by the
8-10
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding RIGOL vertical position and scale, and is from (-5*vertical scale - vertical position) to
(5*vertical scale - vertical position). If the data channel is set to any channel of
D0-D15, SDAThreshold will be hidden automatically.
3.
Display-related Setting
Press Format to set the display format of the bus to Hex, Decimal, Binary or
ASCII.
Press Offset and use to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
Press BusStatus to turn the bus display on or off.
4.
Event Table
The event table displays the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time, data direction, ID and ACK information in table or details format. Press Event
Table Event Table to select “ON” (This operation is only available when
BusStatus is set to “ON”) to enter the event table interface.
At this point, you can press View to display the event table in “Table” form (as shown in Figure 8-6) or “Details” form (as shown in Figure 8-7). If a USB storage device is currently connected to the instrument, you can press Export to export the data table to the external USB storage device in CSV format.
Figure 8-6 I2C Event Table (Table)
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
8-11 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
Figure 8-7 I2C Event Table (Details)
5.
Address Information during Decoding
In I2C bus, the front part of each frame of data contains the address information and blue patches are used to represent address ID. In the ID, “Write” is used to represent writing address and “Read” is used to represent reading address.
Press Include R/W. When “Open” is selected, “AddrBits” will include the
“R/W” bit as a part of the address value.
Address Information
Figure 8-8 Address Information during Decoding
8-12
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
6.
Error Expressions during Decoding
When the ACK (ACKnowledge Character) is not met, the red error marks as shown in the figure below will be displayed. Note: The red mark is displayed in different modes according to the horizontal time base setting; when the horizontal time base is relatively smaller, displayed.
is displayed; otherwise, is
ACK=1
Figure 8-9 Error Expressions during Decoding
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
8-13 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
SPI Decoding (Option)
SPI bus is based on the master-slave configuration and usually consists of chip select line (CS), clock line (SCLK) and data line (SDA).
SCLK: sample the SDA on the clock rising edge or falling edge.
SDA: denote the data channel.
SCLK
SDA
Figure 8-10 SPI Serial Bus
If the current trigger type of the trigger system is SPI, pressing CopyTrig can copy the current SPI trigger settings (include the CS/TimeOut mode, clock channel, data channel, data bits and so on) and apply them to the SPI decoding function as well as set the polarity of the SDA data line to high. Then, if needed, you can still set the SPI decoding parameters according to the introductions below.
Note: The copy function is only available when the current trigger type is “SPI”; otherwise, CopyTrig is not available.
Press Decode1 Decode to select “SPI” and open the SPI decoding function menu.
1.
Decoding Mode Setting
Press Mode to select “TimeOut” or “CS”.
When “TimeOut” is selected, press TimeOut and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the timeout time at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the timeout time at a relatively larger step. The adjustable range is from 100 ns to 1 s. The default is 1 μs.
When “CS” is selected, press SS to enter the SS setting submenu. In this menu:
Press Channel to select any channel (CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15) as the CS channel.
Press Polarity to set the polarity of the chip select channel to
8-14
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
(positive polarity) or (negative polarity).
If the CS channel is set to CH1 or CH2, you can press Threshold to set the threshold of the clock channel. The range of the threshold is related to the vertical scale and vertical position and is from (-5*vertical scale - vertical position) to (5*vertical scale - vertical position). If the CS channel is set to any of D0-D15, Threshold will be hidden automatically.
2.
SCLK Setting
Press SCLK to enter the clock line setting interface.
Press Channel to select any channel (CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15) as the clock channel.
Press Slope to set to sample the SDA on the rising or falling edge of the
SCLK.
If the clock channel is set to CH1 or CH2, press Threshold to set the threshold of the clock channel. The range of the threshold is decided by the vertical position and scale, and is from (-5*vertical scale - vertical position) to (5*vertical scale - vertical position). If the clock channel is set to any channel of D0-D15, Threshold will be hidden automatically.
3.
SDA Setting
Press SDA to enter the SDA data line setting interface.
Press Channel to select any channel (CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15) as the SDA data channel.
Press Polarity to set the polarity of the SDA data line to (high) or
(low).
If the data channel is set to CH1 or CH2, press Threshold to set the threshold of the data channel. The range of the threshold is decided by the vertical position and scale, and is from (-5*vertical scale - vertical position) to (5*vertical scale - vertical position). If the data channel is set to any channel of D0-D15, Threshold will be hidden automatically.
4.
Data Bits Setting
Press Data Bits to set the number of bits of each frame of data. The range available is from 4 to 32. The default is 8.
5.
Endian Setting
Press Endian to select “LSB” or “MSB” and the default is “MSB”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
8-15 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
6.
Display-related Setting
Press Format to set the display format of the bus to Hex, Decimal, Binary or
ASCII.
Press Offset and use to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
Press BusStatus to turn the bus display on or off.
7.
Event Table
The event table displays the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time and error information on the data line in table format. It can be used to observe relatively longer decoded data. Press Event Table Event Table to select
“ON” (This operation is only available when BusStatus is set to “ON”) to enter the event table interface as shown in the figure below.
Figure 8-11 SPI Event Table
At this point, “Table” is selected in the View menu automatically and the menu is grayed out. The decoded data is displayed in table format following the time order. If a USB storage device is currently connected to the instrument, press
Export to export the data table to the external USB storage device in CSV format.
8.
Error Expressions during Decoding
When the clock for a frame in SPI is not enough, the data is filled with red patches. For example, when Data Bits is set to 7 and SCLK slope is set to rising edge, decoding error will be generated.
8-16
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
CAN Decoding (Option)
You need to specify the CAN signal type and sample position for CAN decoding. The oscilloscope samples the CAN signal on the specified sample position.
Press Decode1 Decode and select “CAN” to open the CAN decoding function menu.
If the current trigger type of the trigger system is CAN, pressing CopyTrig softkey can copy the current CAN trigger settings (include the source channel, signal type, baud rate, sample position and so on) and apply them to the CAN decoding function.
Then, if needed, you can still set the CAN decoding parameters according to the introductions below.
Note: The copy function is only available when the current trigger type is “CAN”; otherwise, CopyTrig is not available.
1.
Source
Press Source and select any channel (CH1, CH2 or any channel of D0-D15) as the source channel.
If the source channel is set to CH1 or CH2, you can set the threshold of the corresponding analog channel. Press Threshold to open the threshold setting menu. Then, press TTL, CMOS or ECL to set the threshold of the specified channel to the corresponding level value; or press Threshold and use to set the threshold. The settable range is from (-5*vertical scale - vertical position) to
(5*vertical scale - vertical position). The default is 0 V. Pressing down can quickly reset the threshold level to 0 V.
Note: When the threshold selected is beyond the specified range, it will be automatically limited within the range.
If the data channel is set to any channel of D0-D15, Threshold will be hidden automatically.
2.
Signal Type
Press Signal Type to select the desired signal type.
Rx: the received signal from the CAN signal line.
Tx: the sending signal from the CAN signal line.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
8-17 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
CAN_H: the actual CAN_H bus signal.
CAN_L: the actual CAN_L bus signal.
Differential: the CAN differential bus signals connected to an analog channel using a differential probe. The positive lead of the probe connects the CAN_H bus signal and the negative lead connects the CAN_L bus signal.
3.
Baud
Press Baud to select a baud rate (100 kb/s, 125 kb/s, 250 kb/s, 400 kb/s, 500 kb/s (default), 800 kb/s, 1 Mb/s or User) that matches the CAN bus signal. When
“User” is selected, press Setup and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the baud rate at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the baud rate at a relatively larger step. The range is from 10 kb/s to 1 Mb/s.
4.
Sample Point
The Sample point is a point within a bit’s time. The oscilloscope samples the bit level at this point. The sample position is represented by the percentage of “the time from the start of the bit’s time to the sample point time” in the “bit’s time”.
Press Sample Point and use to adjust this parameter with a step of 1%.
The range is from 5% to 95% and the default is 50%.
1bit
60%
70%
80%
Figure 8-12 Sample Position Schematic Diagram
5.
Display-related Setting
Press Format to set the bus display format to Hex, Decimal, Binary or ASCII.
Press Offset and use to adjust the vertical display position of the bus.
Press BusStatus to enable or disable bus display.
6.
Event Table
The event table displays the decoded data, the corresponding line number, time, frame ID, DLC, CRC and ACK information in table or details format. Press Event
Table Event Table to select “ON” (This operation is only available when
8-18
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding RIGOL
BusStatus is set to “ON”) to enter the event table interface.
At this point, you can press View to display the event table in “Table” form (as shown in Figure 8-13) or “Details” form (as shown in Figure 8-14). If a USB storage device is currently connected to the instrument, press Export to export the data table to the external USB storage device in CSV format.
Figure 8-13 CAN Event Table (Table)
Figure 8-14 CAN Event Table (Details)
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
8-19 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
7.
Decoded CAN Data Interpretation
Frame ID: displayed as hexadecimal number and expressed by blue patch.
DLC (Data Length Code): displayed as hexadecimal number and expressed by chartreuse patch.
Data: its display format depends on the format specified in Format (hex, decimal, binary or ASCII). It is expressed by green patch. If the data frame is lost, it will be expressed by red patch.
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): displayed as hexadecimal number. It is expressed by turquoise patch when valid and by red patch when error occurs.
ACK (Acknowledgement): it is expressed by green patch when valid and by red patch when error occurs (the detected ACK is 1).
Frame ID DLC Data CRC ACK
Figure 8-15 Decoded CAN Data Interpretation
8-20
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 9 Reference Waveform
Chapter 9 Reference Waveform
The contents of this chapter:
To Enable REF Function
To Set the Color
To Select REF Source
To Save REF Waveform
To Adjust REF Waveform Display
To Export to Internal or External Memory
To Import from Internal or External Memory
RIGOL
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 9 Reference Waveform
To Enable REF Function
Press REF in the vertical control area (VERTICAL) at the front panel to enable the
REF function.
Note: When the time base is in X-Y mode, REF function cannot be enabled.
MSO2000A/DS2000A provides 10 reference waveform channels. Press Channel, rotate to select the desired reference channel and press down or Channel to turn the selected channel on or off. A channel icon (for example, ) of the channel enabled will be displayed at the left side of the screen grid.
When the REF function is enabled, you can select different color for each reference waveform, set the source of each reference channel, adjust the vertical scale and position of the reference waveform and save the reference waveform to internal or external memory as well as recall it when needed. For the details, please refer to the introductions below.
To Set the Color
MSO2000A/DS2000A series oscilloscope provides five colors (gray, green, light blue, magenta and orange) to mark the reference waveforms of different channels in order to distinguish them.
Press Current and use to select any of the reference channels (Ref1-Ref10) enabled. Then, press Color to specify a different color for the reference waveform of that channel. The corresponding icon at the left of the channel currently selected will be filled with the specified color, for example, .
To Select REF Source
Press Current and use to select any of the reference channels (Ref1 to Ref10) enabled and then press Source to specify a reference source (CH1, CH2, MATH or any channel of D0-D15) for this channel. Only the channels currently enabled can be selected.
9-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 9 Reference Waveform RIGOL
To Save REF Waveform
After the REF source is selected, press Save to save the waveform (screen region) in the specified source to internal memory as reference waveform and display it on the screen.
Note: This operation only saves the reference waveform in the volatile memory and the waveform will be cleared at power-off.
To Adjust REF Waveform Display
You can adjust the vertical scale and vertical position of the reference waveform specified in Current.
Press Current, use to select any channel currently enabled (Ref1-Ref10). Press
, use to adjust the vertical position of the reference waveform. Press , use to adjust the vertical scale of the reference waveform. Press Reset and the reference waveform returns to the position where the source channel waveform is located when the Save operation was executed.
To Export to Internal or External Memory
Users can save the reference waveform in “*.ref” format to the internal memory or external USB storage device. At most 10 reference files (LocalREF0.ref to
LocalREF9.ref) can be saved inside the instrument.
Press Export to enter the file store interface. Please refer to the relative descriptions in “ Store and Recall” to save the reference waveform to internal or external memory.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 9 Reference Waveform
To Import from Internal or External Memory
Users can also import the reference waveform stored in the internal memory or external USB storage device to the instrument.
Press Import to enter the file recall interface. Please refer to the relative descriptions in “ Store and Recall” to import the reference waveform to the instrument.
9-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 10 Pass/Fail Test RIGOL
Chapter 10 Pass/Fail Test
During the product design and manufacture process, you usually need to monitor the change of the signal or judge whether the product is up to standard. The pass/fail test function of MSO2000A/DS2000A oscilloscope can fulfill this task perfectly.
The contents of this chapter:
To Enable Pass/Fail Test
To Select Source
Mask Range
To Set Test Results Output Type
To Save the Test Mask
To Load the Test Mask
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
10-1 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 10 Pass/Fail Test
To Enable Pass/Fail Test
Press Utility Pass/Fail Enable to select “ON”. The area covered by blue on the screen denotes the failure area and if the waveform measured at certain time point during the measurement process passes through the failure area, it will be treated as failed frame. Press Operate to select “ ” to start testing and select “ ■ ” to stop testing.
Note: The pass/fail test function is not available in the following status.
In X-Y time base mode;
In ROLL time base mode;
In Y-T time base mode and the horizontal time base is set to 200ms/div or slower, namely the instrument enters “Slow Sweep” mode;
When the waveform record is enabled;
None of the analog channels (CH1, CH2) is turned on.
After the pass/fail test is enabled, you can set the output type of the test results according to “To Set Test Results Output Type”. You can also select the signal source, set the test mask range, create mask as well as save and recall the test mask.
For the details, refer to the introductions below.
To Select Source
Press Source to select the channel (CH1 or CH2) to be tested and only channels enabled can be selected.
Mask Range
Users can define their desired test masks. If the waveform passes through the mask range (namely the waveform enters the area covered by blue), it is judged as a failed frame.
Press Range Range to select “Screen” or “Cursor”. The default is “Screen”.
When “Screen” is selected, press X Mask and Y Mask respectively and rotate to
10-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 10 Pass/Fail Test RIGOL adjust the horizontal tolerance range and vertical tolerance range of the test mask.
The horizontal and vertical adjustment ranges are 0.02 div to 4 div and 0.04 div to
5.12 div respectively. During the adjustment, two white curves would be displayed in the interface to show the outline of the current mask. Press Create to apply the mask currently created (the area not covered by blue within the screen), as shown in the figure below.
Figure 10-1 Test Mask (Screen Region)
When “Cursor” is selected, two gray cursor lines appear on the screen (used to indicate the current test mask range); cursor A is on the left and cursor B is on the right. Press CursorA and CursorB respectively and use to adjust the positions of cursor A and cursor B. Or, press CursorAB and use to adjust the positions of cursor A and cursor B at the same time (the horizontal distance keeps unchanged).
Then, adjust the horizontal tolerance range and vertical tolerance range as well as create the mask (the area not covered by blue within the cursor region) by referring to the methods above; as shown in the figure below.
Figure 10-2 Test Mask (Cursor Region)
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
10-3 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 10 Pass/Fail Test
To Set Test Results Output Type
You can set the output type of the test results referring to the following methods.
1.
The Statistic Message
Press Message to select “ON” or “OFF”. When “ON” is selected, the statistic message of the test results (including the number of the failed frames, the passed frames and the total frames) will be displayed at the upper right corner of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
2.
Stop on Fail
Press StopOnFail to select “ON” or “OFF”.
ON: when a failed waveform is detected, the oscilloscope will stop the test and enter the “STOP” state. At this point, the results of the test remain the same on the screen (if Message is set to “ON”) and only one negative pulse is output from the [Trigger Out] connector (if AuxOutput is set to
“ON”) at the rear panel.
OFF: the oscilloscope will continue with the test even though failed waveforms are detected. The test results on the screen will update continuously (if Message is set to “ON”) and a pulse will be output from the [Trigger Out] connector (if AuxOutput is set to “ON”) at the rear panel each time a failed waveform is detected.
3.
Beeper on Fail
Press Output to select “Fail” or “Fail+ ”.
Fail: there is output when a failed waveform is detected; but, the beeper does not sound.
Fail+ : there is output when a failed waveform is detected and the beeper sounds (not related to the on/off state of the sound) at the same time.
4.
[Trigger Out] Outputs Pulse
Press AuxOutput to select “ON” or “OFF”. If “ON” is selected, the oscilloscope
10-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 10 Pass/Fail Test RIGOL outputs a pulse from the [Trigger Out] connector at the rear panel when a failed waveform is detected.
You can also press Utility AuxOutput and select “PassFail” to set this output.
To Save the Test Mask
Users can save the current test mask in “*.pf” format to the internal Flash memory or external USB storage device. The internal memory can store at most 10 test mask files (LocalPF.pf).
Press Save to enter the file store interface. Please refer to the relative descriptions in
“ Store and Recall” to save the test mask file to the internal or external memory.
To Load the Test Mask
Users can also load the test mask files (*.pf) stored in the internal Flash memory or external USB storage device to the instrument.
Press Load to enter the file recall interface. Please refer to the relative descriptions in “ Store and Recall” to load the test masks to the instrument.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
10-5 [email protected]
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 11 Waveform Record RIGOL
Chapter 11 Waveform Record
Waveform record can record the waveforms of the analog channels (CH1 and CH2) and the digital channels (D0-D15). In record constant on (open) mode, the oscilloscope can record the input waveform continuously until users press
RUN/STOP. Waveform playback and analysis can provide better waveform analysis effect.
Note:
1.
The horizontal time base must be set to Y-T mode during waveform record.
2.
The digital channels only support waveform record and waveform playback; they do not support waveform analysis.
The contents of this chapter:
Waveform Record
Record Constant On
Waveform Playback
Waveform Analysis
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
11-1 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 11 Waveform Record
Waveform Record
When the waveform record function is turned on, waveforms from all the channels currently turned on will be recorded. Press Utility Record Mode and use to select “Record” to open the waveform record operation menu.
1.
End Frame
Press End Frame; use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the the desired number of frames to be recorded at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the the desired number of frames to be recorded at a relatively larger step. The available range is from 1 to the maximum number of frames that can be recorded currently (displayed in
Total Frames).
2.
Record Operation
Waveform recod can be realized via the menu or the shortcut buttons at the
front panel.
Menu Front Panel
Press Operate and select “ start recoding.
● ” to
Press ; the backlight goes on (in red) and starts to flash, indicating that the record is started.
When the record is finished, “ ● ” changes to “ ■ ” automatically.
You can also select “ ■ ” manually to stop recording.
When the record is finished, goes off automatically and goes on (in orange). You can also press directly to stop recording.
3.
Interval
Press Interval; use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the time interval at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the time interval at a relatively larger step. The range available is from 100 ns to 10 s.
4.
Total Frames
The menu shows the maximum number of frames that can be recorded currently.
The number of points of each frame is the current memory depth [1] . As the
11-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 11 Waveform Record RIGOL capacity of the waveform memory is fixed, the more the number of points each frame of waveform has, the less the number of waveform frames can be recorded. Thus, the maximum end frame of waveform record is decided by the memory depth currently selected. Please refer to the instruction in “Memory
Depth” to select the desired memory depth. In addition, the maximum number of frames is also related to the on/off states of the digital channels.
Note [1] : Memory depth = Sample rate × Horizontal time base × Number of grids horizontally on the screen; wherein, for MSO2000A/DS2000A, “Number of grids horizontally on the screen” is 14. Therefore, when the memory depth is set to "Auto", the maximum end frame of waveform record is also related to the “Sample rate” and “Horizontal time base”.
Table 11-1 Memory Depth and Maximum Number of Frames (In this example, only a single channel is turned on)
Memory Depth Maximum End Frame
14 k points None of the digital channels is turned on: 8128
140 k points
1.4M points
One or more digital channels are turned on: 4088
508
63
14M points
56M points
Auto
7
2
Related to the “Sample Rate” and “Horizontal Time Base”
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
11-3 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 11 Waveform Record
Record Constant On
MSO2000A/DS2000A provides record “Open” (record constant on) mode for waveform record. When this mode is enabled, the oscilloscope records the waveform continuously according to the current memory depth. The length of the waveform recorded is limited by the memory depth (sample rate and horizontal time base) and the waveform data recorded before will be overwritten by the waveform currently recorded. In this mode, the other oscilloscope operations (except “Pass/Fail Test”,
"Protocol Decoding" as well as “Acquisition Mode” and “Memory Depth” in the sample system setting and “Time Base Mode” in the horizontal system setting) are not affected.
Press Utility Record Mode and use to select “Open”. At this point, the waveform record key at the front panel turns red and the oscilloscope records the waveform continuously according to the current memory depth. The oscilloscope stops recording until users press RUN/STOP and at this point, users can play back or analyze the waveform.
In constant on mode, the oscilloscope can capture the accidental abnormal signals during the adjustment. Following is an application example of the record constant on mode. Use MSO2000A/DS2000A (CH1) to observe a pulse which might contain runt pulses.
1.
Connect the pulse under test to CH1 of the oscilloscope. Adjust the oscilloscope to make it trigger stably.
2.
Enable record constant on mode.
11-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 11 Waveform Record RIGOL
Figure 11-1 Record Constant On
3.
Press RUN/STOP to stop the record.
4.
Analyze the waveform recorded using waveform analysis and as shown in the figure below, the runt pulses are captured.
Figure 11-2 Analyze the waveform recorded
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
11-5 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 11 Waveform Record
Waveform Playback
Waveform playback can play back the waveforms currently recorded. After recording the waveforms, press Utility Record Mode and use to select “Play back”.
At this point, the information as shown in the figure below is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen, indicating the specific frame currently displayed on the screen. During the playback, this value would change continuously.
Please refer to the following descriptions to set the playback parameters.
1.
Play Mode
Press this softkey to set the playback mode to cycle or single.
: cycle playback. Play from the start frame to the end frame and then repeat until you stop it manually.
: single playback. Play from the start frame to the end frame and then stop.
2.
Interval
Press this softkey and use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the time interval of playback at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the time interval of playback at a relatively larger step. The range availbale is from 100 ns to 10 s and the default is 100 ns.
3.
Start Frame
Press this softkey and use to set the start frame of playback. The default is 1 and the maximum is the maximum number of frames recorded.
4.
Current Frame
Press this softkey and set the current frame using or the navigation knob by referring to the method mentioned above. By default, the current frame is the same with the end frame. The setting range of current frame is related to the start frame and end frame settings. During the setting, the screen will display the corresponding waveform of the current frame synchronously, namely manual playback.
If you perform the playback operation after setting this parameter, this menu will be adjusted to the start frame value automatically and will change continuously
11-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 11 Waveform Record RIGOL during the playback process.
5.
End Frame
Press this softkey and use to set the end frame of the playback. The default is the total number of frames of the waveform recorded.
6.
Playback Operation
Waveform playback can be realized through the menu or the shortcut buttons at the front panel.
Menu Front Panel
Press ; the backlight flashes, Press Operate and select “ ” to start playing back.
Press Operate and select “ ” to pause the playback. indicating that the playback is started.
Press again (the backlight goes on
(yellow)) to pause the playback.
Press Operate and select “ ■” stop the playback.
Press to stop the playback.
7.
Time Tag
The time tag is used to display the absolute recording time of each frame of the waveform currently recorded. Press Time Tag to enable or disable the time tag function. When it is enabled, the time tag information is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen as shown in the figure below.
T
0
: display the absolute starting time of the waveform record.
△ T: display the recording time deviation of the current waveform relative to the first frame of waveform. This value changes accordingly during the waveform playback process.
Tip
During waveform playback, RUN/STOP can be used to switch between playback and pause. Each time SINGLE is pressed, the Current Frame moves one frame forward.
11-7 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 11 Waveform Record
Waveform Analysis
This function is used to analyze the recorded waveform. Press Utility Record
Mode and use to select “Analyze” to open the waveform analysis menu. At this point, the screen is divided into two display areas as shown in the figure below.
Settings and Results Templet Display Current Frame
Figure 11-3 Waveform Analysis
Please refer to the following explanations to set the waveform analysis parameters.
1.
Analyze
Press Analyze to select the desired analysis mode.
Trace: perform analysis on the basis of the templet selected by users. For the detailed information, refer to “Analysis Based on Trace”.
Pass/Fail: perform analysis on the basis of the Pass/Fail mask created by users. For the detailed information, refer to “Analysis Based on
Pass/Fail Mask”.
2.
Source
Press Source to select the channel (CH1 or CH2) to be analyzed.
Note: Only channels currently enabled can be selected.
11-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 11 Waveform Record RIGOL
3.
Start
Before performing the analysis, please set the templet by referring to “Analysis
Based on Trace” or create the mask by referring to “Analysis Based on
Pass/Fail Mask” according to the analysis mode currently selected. Then, press Start to enable waveform analysis.
Note: During the analysis process, the progress bar is displayed and the parameters cannot be modified.
After the analysis finishes, the analysis results of “Error Frames”, “Current Error” and “CurFrame Diff” are displayed; at the same time, the first error frame is located as shown in the figure below. At this point, the next error frame, the previous error frame as well as every frame in this waveform analysis can be located using the corresponding softkeys.
Error Frames:
The total number of error frames discovered in this analysis. The number of error frames is related to the error frame threshold currently set.
Current Error:
The order number of the error frame lately located in all the error frames when locating every data frame in this analysis.
CurFrame Diff:
During the analysis based on trace, the oscilloscope compares each frame with the templet to compute the difference value and normalizes each value using the maximum one; then, compares the normalized value of each frame with the threshold selected to judge whether the frame is an error frame. “CurFrame
Diff” (relative difference) is the normalized value of the difference between the current frame and templet.
During the analysis based on pass/fail mask, the oscilloscope compares each frame with the mask to compute the difference value and recognizes the frame
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
11-9 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 11 Waveform Record whose difference value is equal to or larger than the threshold selected as an error frame and the corresponding “CurFrame Diff” is 100%; otherwise, the frame is judged as correct and the “CurFrame Diff” is 0%.
Note: There are only two “CurFrame Diff” values (100% and 0%) under the analysis based on pass/fail mask.
4.
Cancel
During the analysis, users can press Cancel to stop the analysis and press Start again to restart the analysis.
5.
Previous
After the waveform analysis finishes, pressing Previous can locate the error frame previous to the current error frame. Pressing RUN/STOP can also perform the operation.
6.
Next
After the waveform analysis finishes, pressing Next can locate the error frame following the current error frame. Pressing SINGLE can also perform the operation.
7.
Current Frame
Press Current Frame; use or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the data frame currently displayed at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust the data frame currently displayed at a relatively larger step. The adjustable range is from 1 to the total number of frames in this waveform analysis. Using the navigation knob can also perform the operation.
8.
Setup
Press Setup to open the more detailed setting menu.
Screen Start: press this key to set the start point of waveform analysis and the range is from 5 to 685. The start point must be less than the “Screen
End - 10” currently set.
Screen End: press this key to set the end point of waveform analysis and the range is from 15 to 695. The end point must be greater than the
“Screen Start + 10” currently set.
Start Frame: press this key to set the start frame of waveform analysis
11-10
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 11 Waveform Record RIGOL
(refer to the setting method of the current frame mentioned above) and the default is the first frame.
End Frame: press this key to set the end frame of waveform analysis (refer to the setting method of the current frame mentioned above) and the default is the last frame.
Threshold: press this key to set the threshold of waveform analysis and the range is from 1% to 99%. The threshold is used to judge whether the frame is an error frame. A frame is recognize as an error one if the (relative) difference value between the frame and the templet is equal to or larger than the threshold currently set.
9.
Time Tag
The time tag is used to display the absolute recording time of each frame of the waveform currently recorded. Press Time Tag to enable or disable the time tag function. When it is enabled, the time tag information is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen as shown in the figure below.
T
0
: display the absolute starting time of the waveform record.
△ T: display the recording time deviation of the current waveform relative to the first frame of waveform.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
11-11 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 11 Waveform Record
Analysis Based on Trace
Press Analyze and select “Trace”. Then, set the templet used in analysis based on trace through the method below.
1.
Trace
Press Trace to select the creation method of analysis templet.
Current Frame: select the current frame as the analysis templet.
Average: select the average of the current data frame as the analysis templet.
2.
Setup Template
Press SetupTemplate to configure the templet immediately. After the analysis starts, the oscilloscope compares each frame with the templet and determines whether error frame exists according to the threshold currently set.
3.
TemplateDisp
Press TemplateDisp to enable or disable templet display.
11-12
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 11 Waveform Record RIGOL
Analysis Based on Pass/Fail Mask
Press Analyze and select “Pass/Fail”. Then, set the templet used in analysis based on Pass/Fail mask through the method below.
Press Range to open the mask range setting menu. Please refer to the introduction in “ Mask Range” to create the test mask used in waveform analysis.
Besides, you can store the current test mask in “*.pf” format into the internal memory or external USB storage device or load the test mask file stored in the internal memory or external USB storage device into the instrument. Press Save to enter the file store interface. Store the test mask file to internal or external memory by referring to the introduction in “Store and Recall”. Press Load to enter the file recall interface. Load the test mask into the instrument by referring to the introduction in “Store and Recall”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
11-13 [email protected]
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 12 Display Control RIGOL
Chapter 12 Display Control
You can set the type, persistence time and brightness of waveform display as well as the grid type, grid brightness of the screen display and the menu display time.
The contents of this chapter:
To Select the Display Type
To Set the Persistence Time
To Set the Waveform Intensity
To Set the Screen Grid
To Set the Grid Brightness
To Set the Menu Display
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
12-1 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 12 Display Control
To Select the Display Type
Press Display Type to set the waveform display type to “Vectors” or “Dots”.
Vectors: the sample points are connected by lines and displayed, as shown in the left figure below. Normally, this mode can provide the most vivid waveform to view the steep edge of the waveform (such as square waveform).
Dots: display the sample points directly, as shown in the right figure below. You can directly view each sample point and use the cursor to measure the X and Y values of the sample point.
Vectors Dots
To Set the Persistence Time
Press Display PersistTime to set the persistence time of the oscilloscope to Min, specific values (from 50 ms to 20 s) or Infinite.
In the following part, a frequency sweep signal of the sine waveform is used to demonstrate the waveform effects in different persistence times.
1.
Min
Enable to view waveform changing in high refresh rate.
12-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 12 Display Control RIGOL
2.
Specific Values
Enable to observe glitch that changes relatively slowly or glitch with low occurrence probability. The persistence time can be set to 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s or 20 s.
3.
Infinite
In this mode, the oscilloscope displays the waveform newly acquired without clearing the waveforms acquired formerly. The waveforms acquired formerly will be displayed in relatively low-brightness color and the waveform newly acquired will be displayed in normal brightness and color. Infinite persistence can be used to measure noise and jitter and to capture incidental events.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
12-3 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 12 Display Control
To Set the Waveform Intensity
Press Display WaveIntensity or turn when the menu is hidden to adjust the waveform brightness of the analog channel. The default is 50% and the range available is from 0% to 100%.
To Set the Screen Grid
Press Display Grid to set the screen grid type.
: turn the background grid and coordinate on.
: turn the background grid off and coordinate on.
: turn the background grid and coordinate off.
To Set the Grid Brightness
Press Display Brightness to set the brightness of the screen grid. Turn to adjust the grid brightness. The default is 50% and the range available is from 0% to
100%.
To Set the Menu Display
Press Display MenuDisplay to set the menu display time. The menus displayed at both sides of the screen will hold for a specified period of time after the last button-pressing action and then is hidden. The display time can be set to 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s or Infinite. If “Infinite” is selected, the menus will not be hidden.
Note: When storing a file or inputting a filename, the menus will not be hidden no matter whether the menu display time is set.
12-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 13 Signal Source RIGOL
Chapter 13 Signal Source
MSO2000A/DS2000A combines the signal generator and oscilloscope in one instrument by providing a built-in dual-channel, 25MHz signal generator, thus providing convenience for engineers who need to use the signal generator and oscilloscope at the same time. This chapter introduces how to use the built-in signal generator. As the functions and setting methods of source 1 and source 2 are same, this chapter takes Source 1 for illustration.
Press Source to enter the signal generator setting interface.
Press Source1 to enable or disable the signal output. When it is enabled, the
[Source1] connector at the rear panel outputs signal according to the current setting.
Note: The function of Source Source1 is the same with that of Source
Setup1 Source.
Press Setup1 to set the type and parameters of the signal output from
[Source1].
Press Status to view the parameter settings of Source 1 and Source 2.
The contents of this chapter:
Parameter Setting Method
To Output Basic Waveform
To Output Built-in Waveform
To Output Arbitrary Waveform
Modulation
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
13-1 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 13 Signal Source
Parameter Setting Method
The following two methods are available for setting the basic parameters (such as the frequency, amplitude, start phase and offset) of MSO2000A/DS2000A series oscilloscope.
Method 1:
Rotate or the inner knob of the navigation knob to adjust the parameter at a relatively smaller step or turn the outer knob of the navigation knob to adjust parameter at a relatively larger step.
Method 2:
Press down and the numeric keyboard is displayed, as is shown below. Rotate the knob to select the desired value and unit and then press down the knob to input the value and unit.
Figure 13-1 Numeric Keyboard
Note: The number input cannot exceed 10 digits. Otherwise, “DEL” will be selected automatically and pressing the knob will execute the delete operation.
13-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 13 Signal Source RIGOL
To Output Basic Waveform
To Output Sine
Press Setup1 to open the waveform setting menu. Press Wave and select “Sine”. At this point, you can set the sine parameters.
1.
Source
Press Source to turn on or off the signal output.
2.
Set the frequency
Press Freq to set the frequency of the signal. The range is from 100 mHz to 25
MHz.
Note: For different waveforms, the frequency ranges are different. The frequency range of square is from 100 mHz to 15 MHz; the frequency range of pulse is from 100 mHz to 1 MHz; the frequency range of ramp is from 100 mHz to
100 kHz. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “Parameter
Setting Method”.
3.
Set the amplitude
Press Amp to set the amplitude of the signal. When the impedance is set to
HighZ, the range is from 20 mVpp to 5 Vpp; when the impedance is set to 50 Ω, the range is from 10 mVpp to 2.5 Vpp. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter Setting Method”.
4.
Set the DC offset voltage
Press Offset to set the DC offset of the signal. When the impedance is HighZ, the range is from (-2.5 V + the current amplitude/2) to (2.5 V - the current amplitude/2); when the impedance is set to 50 Ω, the range is from (-1.25 V + the current amplitude/2) to (1.25 V - the current amplitude/2). For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter Setting Method”.
Note: The offset value only contains three effective digits. For example, when the amplitude is set to 30 mVpp (the impedance is 50 Ω), the offset range calculated is from -1.235 V to 1.235 V, while the actual offset range is -1.23 V to
1.23 V.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
13-3 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 13 Signal Source
5.
Set the start phase
Press Start to set the start phase of the signal. The range is from 0° to 360°. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter Setting
Method”.
6.
Align Phase
Pressing Align will re-configure the two channels (Source 1 and Source 2) to output according to the preset frequency and phase. For two signals of which the frequencies are the same or are multiples, this operation can align their phase.
Acquire the waveforms of the two channels using the oscilloscope and display the waveforms stably. After switching the channel status, the phase deviation between the two waveforms is changed. At this point, press Align and the phase deviation shown on the oscilloscope will restore to the current phase deviation between the two waveforms automatically.
7.
Modulation
Press Modulation to turn on or off the modulation function. For the detailed introduction of the modulation function, please refer to “ Modulation”.
8.
Set the impedance
Press Impedance to set the output impedance of the signal generator. It can be set to “HighZ” or “50Ω”.
To Output Square
Press Setup1 to open the waveform setting menu. Press Wave and select “Square”.
At this point, you can set the square parameters. For the detailed setting method, refer to the introduction in “ To Output Sine”. The duty cycle of square is fixed at
50%.
13-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 13 Signal Source RIGOL
To Output Ramp
Press Setup1 to open the waveform setting menu. Press Wave and select “Ramp”.
At this point, you can set the ramp parameters. For the detailed setting method, refer to the introduction in “ To Output Sine”. This section only introduces “Symmetry”.
Symmetry
It is defined as the percentage that the rising period of the ramp takes up in the whole period. t Symmetry=t/T*100%
T
Set the symmetry
Press Symmetry and use or the navigation knob to set the symmetry of the ramp waveform. The range is from 0% to 100%. The default is 10.0%.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
13-5 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 13 Signal Source
To Output Pulse
Press Setup1 to open the waveform setting menu. Press Wave and select “Pulse”.
At this point, you can set the pulse parameters. For the detailed setting method, refer to the introduction in “ To Output Sine”. This section only introduces “DutyCycle”.
Duty Cycle
It is defined as the percentage that the high level takes up in the whole pulse period. t
Duty Cycle=t/T*100%
T
Set the duty cycle
Press DutyCycle and use or the navigation knob to set the duty cycle of the pulse. The range is from 10% to 90%. The default is 20.0%.
To Output DC
Press Setup1 to open the waveform setting menu. Press Wave and select “DC”. At this point, you can output a DC signal with the specified offset.
Set the offset
Press Offset to set the offset of the DC signal. When the impedance is HighZ, the range is from -2.5 V to +2.5 V; when the impedance is set to 50 Ω, the range is from
-1.25 V to +1.25 V. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in
“ Parameter Setting Method”.
13-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 13 Signal Source RIGOL
To Output Noise
Press Setup1 to open the waveform setting menu. Press Wave and select “Noise”.
At this point, you can output noise signal with specified amplitude.
1.
Set the amplitude
Press Amp to set the amplitude of the signal. When the impedance is set to
HighZ, the range is from 20 mVpp to 5 Vpp; when the impedance is set to 50 Ω, the range is from 10 mVpp to 2.5 Vpp. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter Setting Method”.
2.
Set the offset
Press Offset to set the DC offset of the noise signal. When the impedance is
HighZ, the range is from (-2.5 V + the current amplitude/2) to (2.5 V - the current amplitude/2); when the impedance is set to 50 Ω, the range is from
(-1.25 V + the current amplitude/2) to (1.25 V - the current amplitude/2). For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter Setting
Method”.
Note: The offset value only contains three effective digits. For example, when the amplitude is set to 30 mVpp (the impedance is 50 Ω), the offset range calculated is from -1.235 V to 1.235 V, while the actual offset range is from -1.23
V to 1.23 V.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
13-7 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 13 Signal Source
To Output Built-in Waveform
MSO2000A/DS2000A series oscilloscope provides 7 kinds of built-in waveforms, including Sinc, ExpRise, ExpFall, ECG, Gauss, Lorentz and Haversine.
Figure 13-2 Sinc Function Waveform
Figure 13-3 ExpRise Function Waveform
13-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 13 Signal Source RIGOL
Figure 13-4 ExpFall Function Waveform
Figure 13-5 Analog ECG
Figure 13-6 Gauss Function Waveform
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
13-9 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 13 Signal Source
Figure 13-7 Lorentz Function Waveform
Figure 13-8 Haversine Function Waveform
Press Setup1 to open the waveform setting menu. Press Wave and select “Built-in”.
At this point, you can set the output signal parameters according to the type of the built-in waveform selected.
1.
Select built-in waveform
Press Built-in to select any of the 7 built-in waveforms.
2.
Set the frequency
Press Freq to set the frequency of the signal. The range is from 100 mHz to 1
MHz. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter
Setting Method”.
13-10
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 13 Signal Source RIGOL
3.
Set the amplitude
Press Amp to set the amplitude of the signal. When the impedance is set to
HighZ, the range is from 20 mVpp to 5 Vpp; when the impedance is set to 50 Ω, the range is from 10 mVpp to 2.5 Vpp. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter Setting Method”.
4.
Set the DC offset voltage
Press Offset to set the DC offset of the signal. When the impedance is HighZ, the range is from (-2.5 V + the current amplitude/2) to (2.5 V - the current amplitude/2); when the impedance is set to 50 Ω, the range is from (-1.25 V + the current amplitude/2) to (1.25 V - the current amplitude/2). For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter Setting Method”.
Note: The offset value only contains three effective digits. For example, when the amplitude is set to 30 mVpp (the impedance is 50 Ω), the offset range calculated is from -1.235 V to 1.235 V, while the actual offset range is -1.23 V to
1.23 V.
5.
Set the start phase
Press Start to set the start phase of the signal. The range is from 0° to 360°.
For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter Setting
Method”.
6.
Align Phase
Pressing Align will re-configure the two channels (Source 1 and Source 2) to output according to the preset frequency and phase. For two signals of which the frequencies are the same or are multiples, this operation can align their phase. Acquire the waveforms of the two channels using the oscilloscope and display the waveforms stably. After switching the channel status, the phase deviation between the two waveforms is changed. At this point, press Align and the phase deviation shown on the oscilloscope will restore to the current phase deviation between the two waveforms automatically.
7.
Modulation
Press Modulation to turn on or off the modulation function. For the detailed introduction of the modulation function, please refer to “ Modulation”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
13-11 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 13 Signal Source
8.
Set the impedance
Press Impedance to set the output impedance of the signal generator. It can be set to “HighZ” or “50Ω”.
To Output Arbitrary Waveform
MSO2000A/DS2000A allows users to define their own arbitrary waveform and save it in the internal or external memory. At most 10 arbitrary waveforms (LocalArb0.arb to
LocalArb9.arb) can be stored in the internal memory. The user-defined waveform can contain 1 to 16384 data points (namely 1 pts to 16 kpts).
1.
Set the frequency
Press Freq to set the frequency of the signal. The range is from 100 mHz to 10
MHz. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter
Setting Method”.
2.
Set the amplitude
Press Amp to set the amplitude of the signal. When the impedance is set to
HighZ, the range is from 20 mVpp to 5 Vpp; when the impedance is set to 50 Ω, the range is from 10 mVpp to 2.5 Vpp. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter Setting Method”.
3.
Set the DC offset voltage
Press Offset to set the DC offset of the signal. When the impedance is HighZ, the range is from (-2.5 V + the current amplitude/2) to (2.5 V - the current amplitude/2); when the impedance is set to 50 Ω, the range is from (-1.25 V + the current amplitude/2) to (1.25 V - the current amplitude/2). For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter Setting Method”.
Note: The offset value only contains three effective digits. For example, when the amplitude is set to 30 mVpp (the impedance is 50 Ω), the offset range calculated is from -1.235 V to 1.235 V, while the actual offset range is -1.23 V to
1.23 V.
4.
Set the start phase
Press Start to set the start phase of the signal. The range is from 0° to 360°.
13-12
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 13 Signal Source RIGOL
For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “Parameter Setting
Method”.
5.
Align Phase
Pressing Align will re-configure the two channels (Source 1 and Source 2) to output according to the preset frequency and phase. For two signals of which the frequencies are the same or are multiples, this operation can align their phase. Acquire the waveforms of the two channels using the oscilloscope and display the waveforms stably. After switching the channel status, the phase deviation between the two waveforms is changed. At this point, press Align and the phase deviation shown on the oscilloscope will restore to the current phase deviation between the two waveforms automatically.
6.
Select waveform
Select the arbitrary waveform in the internal or external memory or channel signal. For the detailed operation, please refer to the introduction in “To Select
Waveform”.
7.
Create waveform
Users define their own arbitrary waveform. For the detailed operation, please refer to the introduction in “To Create Waveform”.
8.
Edit waveform
Edit the arbitrary waveform stored. For the detailed operation, please refer to the introduction in “To Edit Waveform”.
9.
Modulation
Press Modulation to turn on or off the modulation function. For the detailed introduction of the modulation function, please refer to “ Modulation”.
10.
Set the impedance
Press Impedance to set the output impedance of the signal generator. It can be set to “HighZ” or “50Ω”.
The following section introduces how “To Select Waveform”, “To Create
Waveform” and “To Edit Waveform”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
13-13 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 13 Signal Source
To Select Waveform
Press Select to open the waveform selection menu.
1.
To Select Stored Waveform
Press Stored to enter the file recall interface. Users can select the arbitrary waveform stored in the internal or external memory to recall. Use to select the desired waveform and press Load.
2.
To Select Channel Waveform
Press Channel Source to select the desired source (CH1, CH2 or
MATH).
Press Channel Range to select “Screen” or “Cursor”. When “Cursor” is selected, two orange cursor lines occur on the screen; at this point, you can adjust the positions of the corresponding cursor line by pressing CursorA or CursorB respectively and then rotating ; you can also adjust the positions of cursors A and B at the same time by pressing CursorAB and rotating .
Pressing Load can output the waveform in the region currently selected.
You can also edit the waveform currently selected; for the details, refer to the introduction in “To Edit Waveform”.
To Create Waveform
Users can create arbitrary waveforms according to their needs. Press Create to enter the waveform creation menu.
1.
Set the Initial Points
When creating a new waveform, the waveform editor will create a waveform formed by two points automatically. By default, point 1 is fixed at 0 s and point 2 is fixed at the middle of the period.
Press Initial to set the initial points of the new waveform. The available range is from 1 to 16384 (16 kpts). For the setting method, please refer to the
13-14
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 13 Signal Source RIGOL introduction in “Parameter Setting Method”.
2.
Interpolation
Press Interp to turn on or off the interpolation mode between the points of the waveform.
ON: the waveform editor connects two points using a straight line.
OFF: the waveform editor will keep a constant voltage level between the two points and create a ladder-like waveform.
3.
Zoom
Press Zoom to turn on or off the zoom function.
ON: the waveform editing window only displays the current point.
OFF: the waveform editing window displays all the initial points.
4.
Current Point
Press Current to select the point to be edited. The range is from 1 to the initial
points. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “Parameter
Setting Method”.
5.
Voltage
Press Voltage to set the voltage of the current point. The range is from -2.5 V to
+2.5 V. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter
Setting Method”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
13-15 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 13 Signal Source
6.
Time
Press Time to set the duration of the current point. This setting is limited by the times of the previous point and following point. The time of point 1 is fixed at 0 s.
For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter Setting
Method”.
7.
Insert
Press Insert to insert a new waveform point between the current point and the next point.
8.
Delete
Press Delete to delete the current point from the waveform and connect the remaining points.
Note: Point 1 cannot be deleted.
9.
Done
Press Done to finish editing the current waveform.
10.
Save
Press Save to enter the file store interface. Please refer to the introduction in
“ Store and Recall” to save the current waveform file in “.arb” format in the internal memory (you can overwrite the original file or save the current waveform again).
You can select the arbitrary waveforms in the internal or external memory for output. For the details, refer to the introduction in “To Select Waveform”.
To Edit Waveform
You can edit the waveform currently stored in the volatile memory of the instrument.
Press Edit to enter the waveform editing menu.
1.
Interp
Press Interp to turn on or off the interpolation mode between the points of the waveform.
13-16
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 13 Signal Source RIGOL
ON: the waveform editor connects two points using a straight line.
OFF: the waveform editor will keep a constant voltage level between the two points and create a ladder-like waveform.
2.
Zoom
Press Zoom to turn on or off the zoom function.
ON: the waveform editing window only displays the current point.
OFF: the waveform editing window displays all the initial points.
3.
Current Point
Press Current to select the point to be edited. The range is from 1 to the initial
points. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “Parameter
Setting Method”.
4.
Voltage
Press Voltage to set the voltage of the current point. The range is from -2.5 V to +2.5 V. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in
“ Parameter Setting Method”.
5.
Time
Press Time to set the duration of the current point. This setting is limited by the times of the previous point and following point. The time of point 1 is fixed at 0 s. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter
Setting Method”.
6.
Insert
Press Insert to insert a new waveform point between the current point and the next point.
7.
Delete
Press Delete to delete the current point from the waveform and connect the remaining points using the current interpolation mode.
8.
Done
Press Done to finish editing the current waveform.
Note: Point 1 cannot be deleted.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
13-17 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 13 Signal Source
9.
Save
Press Save to enter the file store interface. Please refer to the introduction in
“ Store and Recall” to save the current waveform file in “.arb” format in the internal memory (you can overwrite the original file or save the current waveform again).
You can select the arbitrary waveforms in the internal or external memory for output. For the details, refer to the introduction in “To Select Waveform”.
13-18
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 13 Signal Source RIGOL
Modulation
The built-in signal generator of MSO2000A/DS2000A series oscilloscope supports amplitude modulation (AM) and frequency modulation (FM). The modulated waveform consists of the carrier waveform and modulating waveform. The carrier waveform is the waveform output from the signal generator and the modulating signal can be the built-in sine, square, ramp waveform or noise signal.
Press Modulation to open the modulation setting menu.
Press Modulation to turn on or off the modulation function.
Press Type to select the desired modulation type (AM or FM).
Set the modulation parameters based on the modulation currently selected.
AM
AM (Amplitude Modulation), namely the amplitude of the carrier waveform changes with the amplitude of the modulating waveform, as shown in the figure below.
Modulating Waveform
Carrier Waveform
Modulated Waveform
Figure 13-9 Amplitude Modulation
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
13-19 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 13 Signal Source
1.
Select the Carrier Waveform
Press Setup1 to enter the waveform setting interface. Press Wave to select the desired carrier.
Note: When “Pulse”, “DC” or “Noise” is selected, the modulation menu will be hidden automatically.
2.
Set the Carrier Parameters
After selecting the desired carrier, you can refer to the introduction in
“Parameter Setting Method” to set the carrier parameters (frequency, amplitude, etc).
3.
Select the Modulating Waveform
Press Modulation to open the source 1 modulation setting menu. Press Shape to select the desired modulating waveform, including sine, square, ramp waveform or noise.
4.
Set the Modulation Frequency
Press Freq to set the frequency of the modulating waveform. The range is from
1 Hz to 50 kHz. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in
“ Parameter Setting Method”.
5.
Set the Modulation Depth
The modulation depth refers to the strength of the AM and is expressed in percentage. Press Depth to set the modulation depth of the modulating waveform. The range is from 0% to 120%. When it is set to 0%, the output amplitude is half of the carrier amplitude. When it is set to 100%, the output amplitude equals the carrier amplitude. When it is set to a value greater than
100%, envelop distortion will occur which must be avoided in actual circuit; at this point, the output of the instrument will not exceed 5 Vpp (the load is 50 Ω).
13-20
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 13 Signal Source RIGOL
FM
FM (Frequency Modulation), namely the frequency of the carrier waveform changes with that of the modulating waveform, as shown in the figure below.
Modulating Waveform
Carrier Waveform
Modulated Waveform
Figure 13-10 Frequency Modulation
1.
Select the Carrier Waveform
Press Setup1 to enter the waveform setting interface. Press Wave to select the desired carrier.
Note: When “Pulse”, “DC” or “Noise” is selected, the modulation menu will be hidden automatically.
2.
Set the Carrier Parameters
After selecting the desired carrier, you can refer to the introduction in
“Parameter Setting Method” to set the carrier parameters (frequency, amplitude, etc).
3.
Select the Modulating Waveform
Press Modulation to open the source 1 modulation setting menu. Press Shape to select the desired modulating waveform, including sine, square, ramp waveform or noise.
4.
Set the Modulation Frequency
Press Freq to set the frequency of the modulating waveform. The range is from
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
13-21 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 13 Signal Source
1 Hz to 50 kHz.
5.
Set the Modulation Deviation
Press Deviation to set the deviation of the frequency of the modulating waveform relative to the carrier frequency. The range is from 0 Hz to the current carrier frequency and the sum of the frequency deviation and carrier frequency cannot be greater than the sum of the current carrier frequency upper limit and
1 kHz. For the setting method, please refer to the introduction in “ Parameter
Setting Method”.
13-22
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 14 Store and Recall RIGOL
Chapter 14 Store and Recall
Users can save the current settings, waveforms, screen image and parameters of the oscilloscope in internal memory or external USB mass storage device (such as USB storage device) in various file formats and recall the stored settings or waveforms when needed.
The contents of this chapter:
Storage System
Storage Type
Internal Storage and Recall
External Storage and Recall
Disk Management
Factory
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
14-1 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 14 Store and Recall
Storage System
Press Storage to enter the store and recall setting interface.
This oscilloscope provides a USB Host interface at the front panel to connect USB storage device for external storage. The USB storage device connected is marked as
“Disk D”. The internal memory (Local Disk) of the instrument can store 10 setting files, 10 reference waveform files and 10 mask files of the Pass/Fail test. In addition, for MSO2000A-S and DS2000A-S, the internal memory can also store 10 arbitrary waveform files. Below is the disk management interface.
Figure 14-1 Disk Management Interface
Table 14-1 Probable Icons
Icon Description Icon Description
Return to the previous disk management interface
Local Disk Memory
External USB Storage Device
Waveform File
JPEG File
Pass/Fail Mask File
Folder
Return to the previous folder
Unknown File
Bitmap File
CSV File
ARB File --
PNG File
TIFF file
Reference Waveform File
Setting File
Trace File
--
14-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 14 Store and Recall RIGOL
Storage Type
Press Storage Storage to select the desired storage type. The storage and recall descriptions of each type are as follows. If no USB storage device is connected to the instrument currently, only “Setups” is available.
1.
Traces
Save the waveform data in external memory in “*.trc” format. The data of all the channels turned on can be saved in the same file. At recall, the data will be displayed on the screen directly.
2.
Waveforms
Save the waveform data in external memory in “*.wfm” format. The stored files contain the waveform data of the two analog channels and the main setting information of the oscilloscope and all the data can be recalled.
3.
Setups
Save the settings of the oscilloscope in internal or external memory in “*.stp” format. At most 10 setting files (from LocalSetup0.stp to LocalSetup9.stp) can be stored in internal memory. The stored settings can be recalled.
4.
Picture
Save the screen image in external memory in “*.bmp”, “*.png”, “*.jpeg” or
“*.tiff” format. You can specify the file name and saving directory and save the corresponding parameter file (*.txt) under the same directory using the same file name. The recall of image and parameter files is not supported.
After selecting this type:
Press Pic Type to select the desired storage format.
Press Para.Save to enable or disable the parameter save function.
Press Inverted to enable or disable the invert function.
Press Color to set the color of the image. It can be set to “GrayScale” or “Color”.
Press Header to enable or disable the header function. When it is enabled, the header would display the instrument information, such as the model, date and time.
Press Footer to enable or disable the footer function. When it is enabled, the footer would display the serial number of the instrument.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
14-3 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 14 Store and Recall
Tip
After a USB storage device is connected, press storage device.
at the front panel to quickly save the current screen image under the root directory of the USB
5.
CSV
Save the waveform data displayed on the screen or of the specified channels in external memory in a single “*.csv” file. You can specify the file name and the saving directory and save the corresponding parameter file (*.txt) under the same directory using the same file name. The recall of CSV and parameter files is not supported.
After selecting this type:
Press DataDepth to select “Displayed” or “Maximum”. After selecting
“Maximum”, press Channel to select the desired channel ( Note: Only channels currently enabled can be selected).
Press Para.Save to enable or disable the parameter save function.
Press Sequence to select whether to add sequence numbers for the waveform points in the CSV file. You can select “ON” or “OFF”.
14-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 14 Store and Recall RIGOL
Internal Storage and Recall
Internal storage and recall support “Setups” in Storage. In the following part, the storage and recall method and procedures are introduced.
1.
Save the specified oscilloscope setting in internal memory.
1) Connect the signal to the oscilloscope and obtain stable display.
2) Press Storage Storage to select “Setups” and press Save to turn on the disk management interface. Use to select “Local Disk” (the characters turn green) and press down to open the local disk, as shown in Figure
14-2.
3) The local disk can store at most 10 setting files. Use to select the desired storage position, Save is illuminated and then press the softkey to execute the saving operation. If the current position contains a file, the original file can be overwritten or be deleted by pressing Delete. Use to select and then press down to return to the previous directory.
Figure 14-2 Local Disk (Save)
Note: In internal storage, New File and New Folder are not available.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
14-5 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 14 Store and Recall
2.
Load the specified type of file in internal memory.
1) Press Storage Storage to select “Setups” and then press Load to turn on the disk management interface. Use to select “Local Disk” and then press down to open the local disk, as shown in Figure 14-3.
2) Use to select the desired file to load and press Load to load the file selected.
Figure 14-3 Local Disk (Load)
14-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 14 Store and Recall RIGOL
External Storage and Recall
Before using external storage and recall, make sure that the USB storage device is connected correctly. External storage supports all the types of files in Storage but in recall, “Picture” and “CSV” are not supported.
1.
Save the specified type of file in the external USB storage device (take
CSV as an example).
1) Connect the signal to the oscilloscope and obtain stable display.
2) Press Storage Storage to select “CSV” and press Save to turn on the disk management interface. Use to select “Disk D” and press down to open the USB storage device, as shown in Figure 14-4.
3) Use to select the desired storage position. The file can be stored under the root directory or in a certain folder under the root directory of the USB storage device.
Figure 14-4 External Disk (To Select the Storage Position)
4) After the storage position is selected, press New File to turn on the interface as shown in Figure 14-5. Refer to the descriptions in “To Create a
New File or Folder” to create a new file.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
14-7 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 14 Store and Recall
Figure 14-5 External Disk (To Create a New File)
5) Press OK to execute the saving operation.
2.
Load the specified type of file in the external USB storage device (take trace storage as an example).
1) Press Storage Storage to select “Traces” and then press Load to turn on the disk management interface. Use to select “Disk D” and press down to open the USB storage device, as shown in Figure 14-6.
2) Use to select the desired file to load and then press Load to load the selected file.
Figure 14-6 External Disk (To Select the File to Load)
14-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 14 Store and Recall RIGOL
Disk Management
Press Storage Disk.Manage to turn on the disk management interface as shown in Figure 14-1 and use to select the desired disk. The disk currently selected is displayed in green and press down to open the disk selected.
Execute the following operations through the disk management menu:
To Select File Type
To Create a New File or Folder
To Delete a File or Folder
To Rename a File or Folder
To Clear the Local Memory
To Select File Type
Except the file types in Storage, the oscilloscope can also display some files for advanced applications such as mask file of the Pass/Fail test (*.pf), upgrade file
(*.gel), parameter file (*.txt), arbitrary waveform file (*.arb) and reference waveform file (*.ref).
Note: Only MSO2000A-S and DS2000A-S support the *.arb file type.
Press Storage Disk.Manage File Type to select the desired file type. The default is “*.*”. Under the current directory, only files of which the suffix of the file name matches with the file type selected will be displayed in the current disk.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
14-9 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 14 Store and Recall
To Create a New File or Folder
This operation is only valid in external storage. Before using external disk, make sure that the USB storage device is connected correctly.
First, press Storage Disk.Manage and use to select and open the external disk (“Disk D”). Then, select the desired directory under which to create a new file or folder. The default is the root directory of the USB storage device. Lastly, press File
Type to select the desired file type and press New File or directly press New
Folder to turn on the interface as shown in the figure below.
Figure 14-7 To Create a New File or Folder
This oscilloscope supports Chinese/English input method. The file name or folder name can contain letters, numbers, underscores, spaces and Chinese characters and the length of the characters is limited to 31 bytes. The following part introduces how to input a file name or folder name using Chinese/English input method.
Operation Tip
During the name input, use the menu softkeys to select different operation areas, then turn to select the desired content and press down to input the content selected.
14-10
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 14 Store and Recall RIGOL
English Input Method
For example, create a file or folder with the name “Filename”.
1.
Press Keyboard.
1) Use to select English input method “En” and uppercase input state “ a A”.
2) Use to input the letter “F”. If the input is wrong, press Delete to delete the character input.
3) Use to select lowercase input state “ A a”.
4) Use to input the remaining letters “ilename”.
Name Input Area Keyboard Upper-lower Case Switch Input Method Switch
Figure 14-8 English Input Example
2.
During the name input, you can press Name to select the “Name Input Area” and use to move the cursor, then press Delete to delete the characters one by one.
3.
After finishing the input, press OK and the oscilloscope will create a folder or a specified type of file with this name under the current directory.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
14-11 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 14 Store and Recall
Chinese Input Method
For example, create a file or folder with the name “ 文件名 ”.
1.
Press Keyboard.
1) Use to select Chinese input method “ 中 ”.
Note: Chinese is added in the menu items at the right of the screen.
2) Use to input the pinyin “wen”. If the input is wrong, press Delete to delete the pinyin input. After “wen” is input, a series of Chinese characters appear in the “Chinese Chraracter Selecting Area”.
3) Press Chinese and use to select and input “ 文 ”.
4) Use the same method to input “ 件 ” and “ 名 ”.
Pinyin Input Area Chinese Character Selecting Area Input Method Switch
Name Input Area Keyboard Upper-lower Case Switch
Figure 14-9 Chinese Input Example
2.
During the name input, you can press Name to select the “Name Input Area” and then press Delete to delete the Chinese characters one by one.
3.
After finishing the input, press OK and the oscilloscope will create a folder or a specified type of file with this name under the current directory.
14-12
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 14 Store and Recall RIGOL
To Delete a File or Folder
Folder operation is valid only in external storage. Before using the external disk, make sure that the USB storage device is connected correctly.
1.
Delete a file in internal memory.
1) Press Storage Disk.Manage and use to select and open the local disk (“Local Disk”).
2) Press File Type to select the desired type of file to be deleted ( Note: The file types of internal storage include “*.stp”, “*.ref”, “*.pf” and “*.arb”; wherein, “*.arb” is only applicable to MSO2000A-S and DS2000A-S).
3) Use to select the desired file to be deleted.
4) Press Delete OK to delete the file selected.
2.
Delete a file or folder in external memory.
Press Storage Disk.Manage and use to select and open the external disk (“Disk D”). Use to select the file (or folder) to be deleted and then press
Delete OK to delete the selected file (or folder).
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
14-13 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 14 Store and Recall
To Rename a File or Folder
Rename operation is valid only in external storage. Before using the external disk, make sure that the USB storage device is connected correctly.
Press Storage Disk.Manage and use to select and open the external disk
(“Disk D”). Use to select the desired file or folder to rename and then press
Rename to turn on the rename interface. For specific operations, please refer to the descriptions in “ To Create a New File or Folder”.
To Clear the Local Memory
Press Storage Disk.Manage and select “Local Disk”; then, turn to the next page of the menu and press SecurityClear OK to delete all the files stored in the local memory.
Note: Don’t press down after selecting “Local Disk”; otherwise, SecurityClear will be grayed out and disabled.
14-14
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 14 Store and Recall RIGOL
Factory
Press Storage Default to return the oscilloscope to its factory state (refer to the table below).
Table 14-2 Factory
Parameter Factory
Horizontal Setting (HORIZONTAL)
Vertical Setting (VERTICAL)
Acquisition Setting (Acquire)
Trigger Setting (TRIGGER)
Display Setting (Display)
Signal Source (Source)
Cursor Setting (Cursor)
Storage Setting (Storage)
Utility Function Setting (Utility)
Math Operation Setting (MATH->Operate)
Logic Analyzer (LA)
Protocol Decoding (Decode 1, Decode 2)
Reference Waveform Setting (REF)
Horizontal Setting (HORIZONTAL)
Horizontal Time Base 1 μs
Horizontal Offset 0 s
Delayed Sweep OFF
Time Base Type
Time Base Scale
Horizontal Reference
Y-T
Coarse
The Center of the Screen
Vertical Setting (VERTICAL)
Vertical Scale 1 V
Vertical Offset
CH1 Switch
CH2 Switch
Channel Coupling
Bandwidth Limit
Probe Ratio
0 V
ON
ON
DC
OFF
1X
14-15 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Input Impedance
Channel Invert
Amplitude Scale
Channel Unit
1 MΩ
OFF
Coarse
V
Acquisition Setting (Acquire)
Acquisition Mode Normal
Sampling Mode Real Time
Memory Depth
Anti-Aliasing
Auto
OFF
Trigger Setting (TRIGGER)
Trigger Level
Trigger Type
0
Edge
Source
Slope
Trigger Mode
Trigger Coupling
Trigger Holdoff
Noise Reject
CH1
Rising Edge
Auto
DC
100 ns
OFF
Display Setting (Display)
Display Type Vectors
Persistence Time
Waveform Intensity
Screen Grid
Min
50%
Brightness
Menu Display
50%
Infinite
Signal Source (Source) [1]
Source 1 Switch
Source 2 Switch
OFF
OFF
Status Display OFF
Source 1 Setup/Source 2 Setup
Waveform Sine
Channel Switch OFF
14-16
Find Quality Products Online at:
Chapter 14 Store and Recall
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 14 Store and Recall RIGOL
Frequency
Amplitude
Offset
Start Phase
1.00 kHz
5.00 V
0.00 V
0.0°
Modulation
Impedance
Cursor Setting (Cursor)
OFF
HighZ
OFF Mode
Manual
Display Mode X-Y
Source
Screen Region
Time Unit
CH1
Main s
Vertical Unit Source Unit
Horizontal Positions of X Cursors
CursorA -4.000 μs
CursorB 4.000 μs
Vertical Positions of Y Cursors
CursorA 0.000 V
CursorB
Track
Source of CursorA
-4.000 V
CH1
Source of CursorB CH1
Horizontal Positions of X Cursors
CursorA -4.000 μs
CursorB 4.000 μs
Storage Setting (Storage)
Storage Type Setups (when no USB storage device is connected)
Picture (when a USB storage device is connected)
Utility Function Setting (Utility)
Sound
Sound
Pass/Fail Test
OFF
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
14-17 [email protected]
RIGOL
Enable Test
Source
Operate
Mask Range
X Mask
Y Mask
Message Display
Stop On Output
Output
AuxOutput
Waveform Record
Mode
Record
End Frame
Operate
Interval
Total Frames
Playback
Operate
Play Mode
Interval
Start Frame
Time Tag
Analyze
Analysis Mode
Source
Trace Mode
Current Frame
Template Display
Time Tag
System Setting
Vertical Expansion
Screen Saver
Screen Saver Time
AuxOutput
OFF
CH1
OFF
Screen
0.24 div
0.48 div
OFF
OFF
Fail
OFF
OFF
4064
OFF
100 ns
4064
Stop
Single
100 ns
1
OFF
Trace
CH1
Current Frame
1
ON
OFF
Ground
Default
OFF
TrigOut
14-18
Find Quality Products Online at:
Chapter 14 Store and Recall
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 14 Store and Recall
Math Operation Setting (MATH->Operate)
Operate OFF
A+B
Source A CH1
Source B
Invert
Vertical Scale
A-B
Source A
Source B
Invert
CH1
OFF
2 V
CH1
CH1
OFF
2 V Vertical Scale
A×B
Source A
Source B
Vertical Invert
Scale
A÷B
Source A
Source B
Invert
Vertical Scale
FFT
Source
Window Function
Display
Scale
Vertical Scale
Horizontal Scale
Sample Rate
Anti-Aliasing
Logic Operation
Log.Formula
CH1
CH1
OFF
2 U
CH1
CH1
OFF
2 U
CH1
Rectangle
Split dB
20 dBV
1.25 MHz/div
50 MSa/s
OFF
Source A
Source B
Invert
AND
CH1
CH1
OFF
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
14-19 [email protected]
RIGOL
Vertical Scale
Threshold A
Threshold B
Advanced Operation
Expression
Expression
Vertical Scale
Invert
Logic Analyzer (LA) [2]
Channel/Group
On/Off
Waveform Size
Reorder
Threshold Type
Digital Bus
BUS Status
Channel Selection
Endian
Reference Clock
1 U
0 V
0 V
OFF
CH1+CH2
2 V
OFF
D0
D7-D0: OFF; D15-D8: OFF
M
D0-D15
TTL
BUS1
OFF
D7-D0
Normal
None
Slope
Display Type
Format
Jitter Rejection
Jitter Time
ON
5.00 ns
Protocol Decoding (Decode 1, Decode 2)
Decoding Type
Bus Status
Parallel
OFF
Format
Offset
Threshold
Parallel
Clock Channel
Slope
Bus Bits
Rising Edge
Data
Hex
Hex
0
0
CH1
Rising Edge
8
14-20
Find Quality Products Online at:
Chapter 14 Store and Recall
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 14 Store and Recall
Current Bit
Channel
RS232
TX
RX
Polarity
Endian
Baud
Data Bits
Stop Bit
Even-Odd Check
Packet
Packet End
I2C
SCLK
SDA
Include R/W
SPI
Decode Mode
TimeOut
SCLK Channel
SCLK Slope
SDA Channel
0
D0
CH1
None
Normal
LSB
9600 bps
8
1 bit
None
OFF
00 (NULL)
CH1
CH2
Close
TimeOut
1.00 μs
CH1
Rising Edge
CH2
SDA Polarity
Data Bits
Endian
CAN
Source
Signal Type
1 for high level
8
MSB
CH1
Rx
Baud
Sample Point
500 kb/s
50.0%
Reference Waveform Setting (REF)
Channel Setting
Current Channel
Ref1
Ref1
Source CH1
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
14-21 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 14 Store and Recall
Color Gray
Note [1] : Only applicable to MSO2000A-S and DS2000A-S models digital oscilloscopes.
Note [2] : Only applicable to MSO2000A and MSO2000A-S models digital oscilloscopes.
14-22
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 15 System Function Setting
Chapter 15 System Function Setting
The contents of this chapter:
Remote Interface Configuration
System-related
RIGOL
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
15-1 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 15 System Function Setting
Remote Interface Configuration
MSO2000A/DS2000A can communicate with PC via LAN, USB or GPIB (with the
USB-GPIB interface converter provided by RIGOL ) bus. Please refer to the introduction below to configure the corresponding interface before using the remote interfaces.
LAN Setting
Press Utility IO Setting LAN Set to turn on the LAN setting interface. You can view the network connection status and configure the network parameters.
Network Status
Current IP
Config Type
MAC Address
VISA Address
IP Config Type
Status
Figure 15-1 LAN Setting Interface
Network Status
Connect the oscilloscope to your local area network using the network cable. The network interface of the oscilloscope is at the rear panel. The oscilloscope will give different prompts according to the current network connection status.
Net Config Success!
Acquire IP…
IP Conflict!
Unconnected!
DHCP Fail!
Read Status Fail!
15-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 15 System Function Setting RIGOL
IP Configuration Type
The configuration type of the IP address can be DHCP, auto IP or static IP. In different IP configuration type, the configuration mode of the network parameters
(such as the IP address) is different.
DHCP
Press Config Mode and use to select “DHCP”. Then press down to select this type. When DHPC type is valid, the DHCP server in the current network will assign the network parameters (such as the IP address) for the oscilloscope.
Auto IP
Press Config Mode and use to select “Auto IP”. Then press down to select this type. When the auto IP type is valid, disable DHCP manually, Gate and DNS are added to the right side of the screen and users can define the gateway and DNS server address of the oscilloscope. In auto IP mode, the oscilloscope will get the IP address ranging from 169.254.0.1 to 169.254.255.254 and the subnet mask
255.255.0.0 automatically according to the current network configuration.
Static IP
Press Config Mode and use to select “Static IP”. Then press down to select this type. When this type is valid, disable DHCP and auto IP manually, IP Address,
Mask, Gate and DNS are added to the right of the screen. At this point, users can define their own network parameters (such as the IP address) of the oscilloscope.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
15-3 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 15 System Function Setting
1.
Set the IP Address
The format of IP address is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn; wherein, the range of the first
nnn is from 1 to 223 (except 127) and the ranges of the other three nnn are from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for an
IP address available.
Press IP Address and use to input the desired IP address. This setting will be saved in the non-volatile memory and if “Power-off Recall” is set to “Last” and “DHCP” and “Auto IP” are “Off” at the next power-on, the oscilloscope will load the preset IP address automatically.
2.
Set the Subnet Mask
The format of the subnet mask is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn; wherein, the ranges of the
nnn are from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for a subnet mask available.
Press Mask and use to input the desired subnet mask. This setting will be saved in the non-volatile memory and if “Power-off Recall” is set to “Last” and
“DHCP” and “Auto IP” are “Off” at the next power-on, the oscilloscope will load the preset subnet mask automatically.
Set the Gate
You can set this paramter in Auto IP and Static IP mode.
The format of the gate is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn; wherein, the range of the first nnn is from 1 to 223 (except 127) and the ranges of the other three nnn are from 0 to 255.
You are recommended to ask your network administrator for a gate address available.
Press Gate and use to input the desired gate address. This setting will be saved in the non-volatile memory and if “Power-off Recall” is set to “Last” and “DHCP” and “Auto IP” are “Off” at the next power-on, the oscilloscope will load the preset gate address automatically.
15-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 15 System Function Setting RIGOL
Set the Domain Name Server
You can set this paramter in Auto IP and Static IP mode.
The address format of the domain name server is nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn; wherein, the range of the first nnn is from 1 to 223 (except 127) and the ranges of the other three
nnn are from 0 to 255. You are recommended to ask your network administrator for an address available. press DNS and use to input the desired address. Generally, users do not need to set the DNS, therefore this parameter setting can be ignored.
Tips
When the three IP configuration types are all turned on, the priority of the parameter configuration from high to low is “DHCP”, “Auto IP” and “Static IP”.
The three IP configuration types cannot be all turned off at the same time.
Apply the Network Parameter Setting
Press Apply to validate the current network parameter setting.
Initialize the Network Parameters
Press Initialize to return the network parameters to the default state.
mDNS
Press mDNS to enable or disable the multicast Domain Name System (mDNS). This system is used to provide the function of DNS server for service discovery in a small network without a DNS server.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
15-5 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 15 System Function Setting
MAC Address
For each oscilloscope, the MAC address is unique. When attributing IP address for the oscilloscope, the MAC address is usually used to identify the instrument.
VISA Address
Display the VISA address currently used by the oscilloscope.
15-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 15 System Function Setting RIGOL
USB Device
This oscilloscope can communicate with PC or PictBridge printer via the USB Device interface at the rear panel. You need to set the oscilloscope to make it match with different device types.
Press Utility IO Setting USB Device and use to select the desired device type.
Computer: in this type, the oscilloscope can communicate with the PC.
PictBridge: in this type, the oscilloscope can communicate with the PictBridge printer.
GPIB Address
When using the GPIB mode to control the oscilloscope, you need to extend a GPIB interface for the oscilloscope using the USB-GPIB interface converter (need to be ordered separately).
To set the GPIB address of this interface, press Utility IO Setting GPIB and use to input the desired address. The default is 1 and the range is from 1 to 30.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
15-7 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 15 System Function Setting
System-related
Sound
When the sound is enabled, you can hear the sound of the beeper when you press a key or a menu softkey at the front panel or when the prompt message pops up.
Press Utility Sound to select (on) or (off). The default is off. When the sound is turned on, will be displayed at the lower right corner of the screen.
Language
This oscilloscope supports menus in multiple languages as well as Chinese/English help information, prompt messages and interface display.
Press Utility Language and use to select the desired language. Then press down to select the language.
15-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 15 System Function Setting RIGOL
System Information
Press Utility System System Info to view the system information. The system information contains manufacturer, model, serial number, software version and hardware version.
Power-off Recall
You can set the system configuration to be recalled when the oscilloscope is powered on again after power-off.
Press Utility System Power On to select “Last” or “Default”.
Last: return to the setting of the system at last power-off.
Default: return to the factory setting of the system.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
15-9 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 15 System Function Setting
System Time
The system time is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen in “hh:mm
(hour:minute)” format. When printing or storing a waveform, the file output will contain this time information.
Press Utility System System Time System Time to turn on the setting interface as follows.
Figure 15-2 System Time Setting Interface
In the figure, the item in green (such as 2013) is the item that can be modified currently. Use to modify and press down to complete the input. The order of time modifications is: year (2013)
→
month (04)
→
date (13)
→
hour (10)
→ minute (20) → second (49). The setting range of each item conforms to the convention:
Year: 2011 to 2099
Month: 01-12
Date: 01-31 (28, 29 or 30)
Hour: 00 to 23
Minute: 00 to 59
Second: 00 to 59
Press Apply to put the current setting into effect. The time at the lower right corner of the screen will be updated.
15-10
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 15 System Function Setting RIGOL
Screen
When the oscilloscope enters the idle state and holds for a certain period of time, the screen saver program will be enabled.
Press Utility System Screen to open the screen saver setting menu.
“Default” means using the icon RIGOL as the screen saver icon.
Press Time to select the screen saver time. When “OFF” is selected, the screen saver program is disabled. The screen saver time can be set to 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 15 min,
30 min, 45 min, 60 min, 2 hour or 5 hour.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
15-11 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 15 System Function Setting
Self-calibration
The self-calibration program can quickly make the oscilloscope reach the best working state to get the most precise measurement values. You can perform self-calibration at any time especially when the change of the environment temperature is up to or more than 5 ℃ . Make sure that the oscilloscope has been warmed up or operated for more than 30 minutes before the self-calibration.
Disconnect all the input channel connections, and then press Utility Self-Cal to open the self-calibration menu and self-calibration interface.
Press Start and the oscilloscope will start to execute the self-calibration program.
Press Exit to give up the self-calibration operation at any time and return to the previous menu.
Note: Most of the keys are disabled during the self-calibration.
15-12
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 15 System Function Setting
Print Setting
RIGOL
PictBridge is a new print standard. If your oscilloscope and the printer both comply with the PictBridge standard, you can connect the oscilloscope to the printer using a USB cable to print the screen image directly. Devices complies with the PictBridge standard always have the icon as shown in the figure on the right side.
MSO2000A/DS2000A digital oscilloscope supports PictBridge printer. Printers that support PictBridge can be connect directly via the USB Device interface at the rear panel of the oscilloscope. You can set the printer parameters using the oscilloscope to output the corresponding picture.
After connecting the printer, you need to first set the USB device type of the oscilloscope. Press Utility IO Setting USB Device to select “PictBridge”.
Then, press Utility Print Set to set the print parameters.
1.
After setting the print parameters, press this key or press at the front panel to execute the print operation.
2.
Continue
When the print is paused, press this key to resume the unfinished print.
Note: This key is only available after the print is paused.
3.
Abort
Pressing this key can stop the current print via the oscilloscope.
Note: This key is only available during the print process.
4.
Status
Press this key and pop-up message box will be displayed on the screen showing the current print status.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
15-13 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 15 System Function Setting
5.
Print Range
Press this key to set the print range to “Screen” or “Wave” and the default is
“Screen”.
Screen: print the whole screen image.
Wave: only print the waveform area.
6.
Palette
Press this key to set the print color to “Gray Scale” or “Color” and the default is
“Color”.
7.
Paper Size
Press this key to open the size list and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired paper size. You can also press this key continuously to switch among the options. The sizes include “Default”, “A2”, “A3”, “A4”, “A5”, “A6” or
“B5”.
Note: The paper sizes available are related to the property of the printer connected. Sizes not supported by the printer cannot be selected.
8.
File Type
Press this key to open the file type list and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired file type. You can also press this key continuously to switch among the options. The file types include “Default”, “Exif/Jpeg” or “Bmp”.
Note: The file types available are related to the property of the printer connected. File types not supported by the printer cannot be selected.
9.
Print Quality
Press this key to open the print quality list and rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired print quality. You can also press this key continuously to switch among the options. The print qualities include “Default”, “Normal”,
“Draft” or “Fine”.
Note: The print qualities available are related to the property of the printer connected. Print qualities not supported by the printer cannot be selected.
10.
Date Print
Press this key to set the date print to “ON” or “OFF” and the default is “OFF”.
Note: The date print is determined by the property of the printer connected. It cannot be selected if the printer does not support this function.
15-14
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 15 System Function Setting RIGOL
11.
Copies
Press this key to set the number of copies to be printed. Rotate the multifunction knob to select the desired number of copies. The range is from 1 to 999.
12.
Invert
Press this key to set the print color invert to “ON” or “OFF” and the default is
“OFF”.
Power Status
Connect the oscilloscope to AC power using a power cord and at this point, the oscilloscope is energized. MSO2000A/DS2000A oscilloscope allows users to set the power status of the oscilloscope after it is energized. Press Utility PowerStatus to set the power status to “Default” or “Open”.
Default: after the oscilloscope is energized, press the power key at the front panel to start the instrument.
Open: the instrument starts directly when it is energized.
Note: At this point, you can still press the power key at the front panel to turn off the instrument.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
15-15 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 15 System Function Setting
Aux Output
Users can set the type of the signal output from the [Trigger Out] connector at the rear panel.
Press Utility AuxOutput to select the desired output type.
TrigOut
After this type is selected, the oscilloscope outputs a signal that can reflect the current capture rate of the oscilloscope at each trigger. Connect this signal to a waveform display device, measure the signal frequency and the measurement result equals the current acquisition rate.
PassFail
After this type is selected, the oscilloscope will output a pulse signal from the
[Trigger Out] connector at the rear panel when failed waveforms are detected in the pass/fail test.
15-16
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 15 System Function Setting RIGOL
Option Management
This oscilloscope provides multiple options to fulfill your measurement requirements.
To use the option functions, please order the corresponding options according to the order numbers provided in “Appendix A: Accessories and Options” in this manual. You can view the options currently installed on the oscilloscope and activate the newly bought option.
1.
View the installed options
Press Utility Options Installed to open the current option interface. You can view the options currently installed on the oscilloscope and the related information.
2.
Install an option
To install an option, an option license (each instrument corresponds to a license) or option license file is required. Option license is a 28-byte string consisting of uppercase English letters and numbers. Option license file is a file that satisfies the specific format and the file extension is .lic.
After you purchase the desired option, you can get the corresponding key.
Before installing an option, follow the steps below to generate the option license or option license file using the key according to your need.
1) Log in RIGOL official website ( www.rigol.com
); click Customer Center
License Generate to enter the software license generation interface.
2) Input the correct key, instrument serial number (press Utility System
System Info to acquire the instrument serial number) and identifying code in the software license generation interface and press Generate to acquire the option license as well as the download link of the option license file. To use the option license file, click download and download it to the root directory of the USB storage device.
Use the option license
After acquiring the option license, press Utility Options Setup to open the option installation interface. In the interface, you can input the option license and install the option.
15-17 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 15 System Function Setting
1) Press Editor to open the option license input interface as shown in the figure below.
Option License
Input Area
2) Input the option license.
Character Selecting Area
Turn to select the specified character and press the knob to input the character in the “Option License Input Area”. By default, the characters input are displayed in the area from left to right.
Note: The hyphens are not included in the option license.
During the input, you can press Backspace continuously to delete the characters in the “Option License Input Area” from right to left or press
Clear to clear all the characters in the “Option License Input Area”.
3) After inputting the option license correctly, press Apply and the oscilloscope will activate the corresponding option using the option license currently input.
In addition, you can also send SCPI command to install the option. For the detailed method, refer to
MSO2000A/DS2000A Programming Guide
.
Use the option license file
After acquiring the option license file, install the option following the steps below.
1) Confirm that the option license file is located in the root directory of the
USB storage device; insert the USB storage device into the oscilloscope correctly.
2) At this point, the prompt message “License file detected, install?” is displayed. Press License to install the option and the installation progress is displayed. After the option is installed, the current option interface is displayed.
15-18
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 15 System Function Setting RIGOL
Note:
A USB storage device can only store a single option license file of the same instrument; but can store the option license files of multiple different instruments.
During the option installation process, do not power off the instrument or pull out the USB storage device.
Auto Setting
You can set the channel coupling mode after performing AUTO operation (press
AUTO to enable the waveform auto setting function).
Press Utility Auto Setup Coupling to select “Default”, “DC” or “AC”.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
15-19 [email protected]
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 16 Remote Control RIGOL
Chapter 16 Remote Control
MSO2000A/DS2000A oscilloscope can be controlled remotely mainly through the following two methods.
User-defined programming
Users can program and control the oscilloscope by using the SCPI (Standard
Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands. For more information about the commands and programming, refer to the
MSO2000A/DS2000A Programming
Guide
.
Use PC software
Users can use the PC software to send commands to remotely control the oscilloscope. Ultra Sigma of RIGOL is recommended. You can acquire Ultra Sigma from the resource CD in the standard accessories or download the latest version from
RIGOL official website ( www.rigol.com
).
This oscilloscope can communicate with PC through USB, LAN or GPIB (with the
USB-GPIB interface converter provided by RIGOL ) instrument bus. This chapter will give a detailed introduction of how to use Ultra Sigma to control
MSO2000A/DS2000A remotely through various interfaces.
The contents of this chapter:
Remote Control via USB
Remote Control via LAN
Remote Control via GPIB
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
16-1 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 16 Remote Control
Remote Control via USB
1.
Connect the device
Connect the oscilloscope (USB DEVICE) with your PC using a USB cable.
2.
Install the USB driver
This oscilloscope is a USB-TMC device. After you connect the oscilloscope to the
PC and turn both on for the first time (the oscilloscope is automatically configured to USB interface; at the same time, make sure that Utility IO
Setting USB Device is set to "Computer"), the Found New Hardware
Wizard as shown in the figure below is displayed on the PC. Please install the
“USB Test and Measurement Device (IVI)” driver following the directions in the wizard. The steps are as follows.
2
1
16-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 16 Remote Control
3
4
5
6
RIGOL
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
16-3 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 16 Remote Control
7
3.
Search for device resource
Start up Ultra Sigma and the software will automatically search for the instrument resources currently connected to the PC via the USB interface. You can also click to search the resources.
4.
View the device resource
The resources found will appear under the “RIGOL Online Resource” directory and the model number and USB interface information of the instrument will also
16-4 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 16 Remote Control RIGOL be displayed.
For example, MSO2302A (USB0::0x1AB1::0x04B0::DS2A0000000000::INSTR).
5.
Control the instrument remotely
Right click the resource name
“MSO2302A (USB0::0x1AB1::0x04B0::DS2A0000000000::INSTR)” to select
“SCPI Panel Control” to turn on the remote command control panel through which you can send commands and read data.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
16-5 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 16 Remote Control
Remote Control via LAN
1.
Connect the device
Connect the oscilloscope to your LAN using a network cable.
2.
Configure network parameters
Configure the network parameters of the oscilloscope according to the description in “LAN Setting”.
3.
Search for device resource
Start the Ultra Sigma, click displayed. Click
and the panel as shown below is
and the software will search for the instrument resources currently connected to the LAN; the resources found are displayed at the right of the panel. Click to add the resource.
Note: If you want to remove the unwanted resource, click the corresponding resource name to select it and then click .
4.
View device resource
The resources found will appear under the “RIGOL Online Resource” directory.
For example, MSO2302A (TCPIP::172.16.3.83::INSTR).
5.
Control the instrument remotely
Right click the resource name “MSO2302A (TCPIP::172.16.3.83::INSTR)” to select “SCPI Panel Control” to turn on the remote command control panel through which you can send commands and read data.
16-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 16 Remote Control RIGOL
6.
Load LXI webpage
As this oscilloscope conforms to LXI-C standards, you can load LXI webpage through Ultra Sigma (right click the resource name and select “LXI-Web”).
Various important information about the oscilloscope (including the model number, manufacturer, serial number, description, MAC address and IP address) will be displayed on the webpage.
In the LXI webpage, click “Network Settings” at the left side; then, input the initial password “111111” in the pop-up window (by default, the user name is empty) and click “OK” to view or modify the current network settings of the instrument. Besides, you can also click “Security” at the left side of the webpage to reset the password.
Tip
You can also load the LXI webpage by entering the IP address of the instrument in the address bar of the PC browser.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
16-7 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 16 Remote Control
Remote Control via GPIB
1.
Connect the device
Use the USB to GPIB interface converter to extend a GPIB interface for the oscilloscope. Then connect the oscilloscope to your PC using a GPIB cable.
2.
Install the driver of GPIB card
Install the driver of the GPIB card which has been connected to the PC correctly.
3.
Set the GPIB address
Set the GPIB address of the oscilloscope according to the description in “GPIB
Address”.
4.
Search for device resource
Start up Ultra Sigma and click figure below. Click
to open the panel as shown in the
and the software will search for the instrument resources currently connected to the PC via the GPIB interface. The instrument resources found will be displayed on the right side of the panel. Click to add the resource.
Note: If you want to remove the unwanted resource, click the corresponding resource name to select it and click .
If resources cannot be found automatically:
Select the GPIB card address of the PC from the dropdown box of “GPIB0::” and select the GPIB address set in the oscilloscope from the dropdown box of “0::INSTR”.
16-8
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 16 Remote Control RIGOL
Click to check whether the GPIB communication works normally; if not, please follow the corresponding prompt messages to solve the problem.
5.
View device resource
The resources found will appear under the “RIGOL Online Resource” directory.
For example, MSO2302A (GPIB0::1::INSTR).
6.
Control the instrument remotely
Right click the resource name “MSO2302A (GPIB0::1::INSTR)” and select “SCPI
Panel Control” to turn on the remote command control panel through which you can send commands and read data.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
16-9 [email protected]
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 17 Troubleshooting RIGOL
Chapter 17 Troubleshooting
The commonly encountered failures and their solutions are listed below. When you encounter those problems, please solve them following the corresponding steps. If the problem remains still, please contact RIGOL and provide your device information (Utility System System Info).
1.
The screen is still dark after pressing the power key:
(1) Check whether the power switch is really on.
(2) Check whether the power is correctly connected.
(3) Check whether the fuse is burned out. If the fuse needs to be changed, please use the specified fuse.
(4) Restart the instrument after finishing the above inspections.
(5) If it still does not work correctly, please contact RIGOL .
2.
The signal is sampled but no waveform of the signal is displayed:
(1) Check whether the probe is correctly connected to the oscilloscope and item to be tested.
(2) Check whether there are signals generated from the item to be tested (you can connect the probe compensation signal to the problematic channel to determine which has problem, the channel or the item to be tested).
(3) Resample the signal.
3.
The tested voltage amplitude is greater or lower than the actual value
(this problem usually occurs when probe is used):
Check whether the probe ratio of the channel complies with the attenuation ratio of the probe.
4.
There is waveform display but not stable:
(1) Check the trigger source: press MENU Source in the trigger control area (TRIGGER) at the front panel to check whether the trigger source selected complies with the signal channel actually used.
(2) Check the trigger type: general signals should use “Edge” trigger and video signal should use “Video” trigger. Only when the proper trigger type is used, can the waveform be displayed stably.
(3) Check the trigger level: adjust the trigger level to the middle of the signal.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
17-1 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 17 Troubleshooting
(4) Change the trigger coupling type: if edge trigger is currently selected, press
MENU (in the trigger control area (TRIGGER) at the front panel)
Setting Coupling to select “HF Reject” or “LF Reject” to filter out the high-frequency or low-frequency noise that disturbs the trigger.
(5) Change the trigger holdoff setting.
5.
No display after pressing RUN/STOP:
Check whether the trigger mode in the trigger control area (TRIGGER) at the front panel is “Normal” or “Single” and whether the trigger level exceeds the waveform range. If yes, set the trigger level to the middle or set MODE to
“Auto”.
Note: Using AUTO could automatically finish the above setting.
6.
The display of waveform is ladder-like:
(1) The horizontal time base might be too low. Increase the horizontal time base properly to improve the display.
(2) If the display type is “Vectors”, the lines between the sample points may cause ladder-like display. Press Display Type to set the display type to
“Dots” to solve the problem.
7.
Digital waveform is not stable:
(1) Check whether the signal input from the selected trigger source is synchronized with the digital signal.
(2) Adjust the oscilloscope to select the appropriate trigger mode, time base and other general settings.
(3) If the display is still not stable, please check the electrical connections and parameter settings again.
(4) Try to use other probe (such as analog probe) to verify the signal status of the test point.
8.
Fail to connect PC or PictBridge printer through USB:
(1) Press Utility IO Setting USB Device to check whether the current setting matches the device currently connected.
(2) Check whether the USB cable is correctly connected to the oscilloscope.
(3) Check whether the USB cable is in good condition. If needed, restart the oscilloscope.
17-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 16 Remote Control RIGOL
9.
The USB storage device cannot be recognized:
(1) Check whether the USB storage device can work normally.
(2) Make sure that the USB storage device being used is flash storage type.
This oscilloscope does not support hardware storage type.
(3) Make sure whether the capacity of the USB storage device is too large. It is recommended that the capacity of the USB storage device being used with this oscilloscope is no larger than 8 GBytes.
(4) Restart the instrument and then insert the USB storage device to check it.
(5) If the USB storage device still cannot be used normally, please contact
RIGOL .
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
17-3 [email protected]
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 18 Specifications RIGOL
Chapter 18 Specifications
All the specifications are guaranteed except the parameters marked with “Typical” and the oscilloscope needs to operate for more than 30 minutes under the specified operation temperature.
Sample
Sample Mode
Real Time
Sample Rate
Real-time Sample
Analog channe: 2 GSa/s (single-channel), 1 Gsa/s
(dual-channel)
Digital channel: 1 GSa/s (max)
Peak Detect
Averaging
High Resolution
Min Detect Pulse
Width
Analog channe: 500 ps (single-channel), 1 ns (dual-channel)
Digital channel: 2 ns
After both the channels finish N samples at the same time, N can be 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096 or
8192.
12 bits of resolution when ≥5 μs/div @ 1 GSa/s (or ≥10 μs/div
@ 500 MSa/s).
Digital channel: 5 ns
Memory Depth
Analog channel: single-channel: Auto, 14k pts, 140k pts, 1.4M pts, 14M pts and
56M pts (option) are available dual-channel: Auto, 7k pts, 70k pts, 700k pts, 7M pts and 28M pts (option) are available
Digital channel: 14M pts maximum
18-1 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 18 Specifications
Input
Number of
Channels
Input Coupling
Input Impedance Analog channe: (1 MΩ±1%) || (16 pF±3 pF) or 50 Ω±1.5%
Digital channel: (101 kΩ±1%)||(9 pF±1 pF)
Probe Analog channe: 0.01X to 1000X, in 1-2-5 step
Attenuation
Coefficient
Maximum Input
Voltage (1 MΩ)
MSO2XX2A/2XX2A-S: 2 analog channels+16 digital channels
DS2XX2A/2XX2A-S: 2 analog channels
DC, AC or GND
Maximum Input Voltage of the Analog Channel
CAT I 300 Vrms, CAT II 100 Vrms,
Transient Overvoltage 1000 Vpk
Digital channel: CAT I 40Vrms, Transient Overvoltage 800 Vpk
Horizontal
Time Base Scale MSO/DS2302A/2302A-S: 1.000 ns/div to 1.000 ks/div
MSO/DS2202A/2202A-S: 2.000 ns/div to 1.000 ks/div
MSO/DS2102A/2102A-S/2072A/2072A-S:
5.000 ns/div to 1.000 ks/div
Deviation between
Channels
Max Record
Length
Time Base
Accuracy [1]
1 ns (typical), 2 ns (max)
14 Mpts
≤ ± 25 ppm
Clock Drift ≤ ± 5 ppm/year
Max Delay Range Negative delay: ≥1 screen width
Positive delay: 1 s to 100 ks
Time Base Mode Y-T, X-Y, Roll
Number of XYs 1
Waveform
Capture Rate [2]
50,000 wfms/s (dots display)
18-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 18 Specifications RIGOL
Vertical
Bandwidth
(-3 dB) (50 Ω)
Single-shot
Bandwidth (50 Ω)
Vertical
Resolution
Vertical Scale
Offset Range
MSO/DS2302A/2302A-S: DC to 300 MHz
MSO/DS2202A/2202A-S: DC to 200 MHz
MSO/DS2102A/2102A-S: DC to 100 MHz
MSO/DS2072A/2072A-S: DC to 70 MHz
MSO/DS2302A/2302A-S: DC to 300 MHz
MSO/DS2202A/2202A-S: DC to 200 MHz
MSO/DS2102A/2102A-S: DC to 100 MHz
MSO/DS2072A/2072A-S: DC to 70 MHz
Analog channe: 8 bit
Digital channel: 1 bit
When the input impedance is 50Ω: 500 μV/div to 1 V/div
When the input impedance is 1MΩ: 500 μV/div to 10 V/div
When the input impedance is 50Ω:
500 μV /div to 50 mV/div: ± 2 V
51 mV/div to 200 mV/div: ± 10 V
205 mV/div to 1 V/div: ± 12 V
When the input impedance is 1MΩ:
500 μV /div to 50 mV/div: ± 2 V
51 mV/div to 200 mV/div: ± 10 V
205 mV/div to 2 V/div: ± 50 V
2.05 V/div to 10 V/div: ± 100 V
MSO/DS2302A/2302A-S/2202A/2202A-S: 20 MHz/100 MHz
MSO/DS2102A/2102A-S/2072A/2072A-S: 20 MHz
Bandwidth
Limit [1]
Low Frequency
Response
(AC Coupling,
-3 dB)
Calculated Rise
Time [1]
≤5 Hz (on BNC)
MSO/DS2302A/2302A-S: 1.2ns
MSO/DS2202A/2202A-S: 1.8 ns
MSO/DS2102A/2102A-S: 3.5 ns
MSO/DS2072A/2072A-S: 5 ns
DC Gain Accuracy ±2% full scale
DC Offset
Accuracy
±0.1 div ± 2 mV ± 1% offset value
Channel to
Channel Isolation
DC to maximum bandwidth: >40 dB
18-3 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 18 Specifications
Vertical (Digital Channel) (MSO2000A and MSO2000A-S)
Threshold Adjustable threshold of 8 channels per group
Threshold
Selection
TTL (1.4 V)
5.0 V CMOS (+2.5 V)
3.3 V CMOS (+1.65 V)
2.5 V CMOS (+1.25 V)
1.8 V CMOS (+0.9 V)
ECL (-1.3 V)
PECL (+3.7 V)
LVDS (+1.2 V)
0 V
User Def
Threshold Range ±20.0 V, 10 mV step
Threshold
Accuracy
±(100 mV+3% threshold setting)
Dynamic Range ±10 V + Threshold
Minimum Voltage
Swing
500 mVpp
Input Resistance //101 KΩ
Probe Load ≈8 pF
Vertical
Resolution
1 bit
18-4
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 18 Specifications RIGOL
Trigger
Trigger Level
Range
Trigger Mode
Holdoff Range
Internal ± 5 div from center of the screen
EXT ± 4 V
Auto, Normal, Single
100 ns to 10 s
75 kHz High Frequency
Rejection [1]
Low Frequency
Rejection [1]
Trigger
Sensitivity
Edge Trigger
Edge Type
75 kHz
1 div (below 10 mV or noise rejection is enabled)
0.3 div (above 10 mV and noise rejection is disabled)
Rising, Falling, Rising/Falling
Pulse Trigger
Pulse Condition Positive Pulse Width (greater than, lower than, within specific interval)
Negative Pulse Width (greater than, lower than, within specific interval)
2 ns to 4 s Pulse Width
Range
Runt Trigger
Pulse Width
Condition
None, >, <, <>
Pulse Polarity
Pulse Width
Positive, Negative
2 ns to 4 s
Range
Windows Trigger (Option)
Windows Type Rising, Falling, Rising/Falling
Trigger Position Enter, Exit, Time
Windows Time 16 ns to 4 s
Nth Edge Trigger (Option)
Edge Type Rising, Falling
Idle Time
Edge Number
16 ns to 4 s
1 to 65535
Slope Trigger
Slope Condition Positive Slope (greater than, lower than, within specific
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
18-5 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 18 Specifications interval)
Negative Slope (greater than, lower than, within specific
Time Setting interval)
10 ns to 1 s
Video Trigger (HDTV Option)
Signal Standard NTSC, PAL/SECAM, 480P, 576P (Standard)
720P, 1080P and 1080I (Option)
Pattern Trigger
Pattern Setting H, L, X, Rising, Falling
Delay Trigger (Option)
Edge Type Rising, Falling
Delay Type
Delay Time
>, <, <>, ><
2 ns to 4 s
TimeOut Trigger (Option)
Edge Type Rising, Falling, Rising/Falling
Timeout time 16 ns to 4 s
Duration Trigger (Option)
Pattern H, L, X
Trigger Condition >, <, <>
Duration Time 2 ns to 4 s
Setup/Hold Trigger
Edge Type Rising, Falling
Data Type H, L
Setup Time
Hold Time
2 ns to 1 s
2 ns to 1 s
RS232/UART Trigger
Polarity Normal, Invert
Trigger Condition Start, Error, Check Error, Data
Baud Rate 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps, 230400 bps, 460800 bps, 921600 bps,
1Mbps, User
Data Bits 5 bit, 6 bit, 7 bit, 8 bit
I2C Trigger
Trigger Condition Start, Restart, Stop, Missing ACK, Address, Data, A&D
Address Bits 7 bit, 8 bit, 10 bit
Address Range 0 to 127, 0 to 255, 0 to 1023
18-6
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 18 Specifications RIGOL
Byte Length
SPI Trigger
1 to 5
Trigger Condition Timeout
Timeout Value 100 ns to 1 s
Data Bits 4 bit to 32 bit
Data Line Setting H, L, X
CAN Trigger (Option)
Signal Type Rx, Tx, CAN_H, CAN_L, Differential
Trigger Condition SOF, EOF, FrameType, FrameError
Signal Rate
Sample Points
Frame Type
10 kbps, 20 kbps, 33.3 kbps, 50 kbps, 62.5 kbps, 83.3 kbps,
100 kbps, 125 kbps, 250 kbps, 500 kbps, 800 kbps, 1 Mbps,
User
5% to 95%
Data, Remote, Error, OverLoad
Error Type Bit Fill, AnswerError, CheckError, FormatError, RandomError
USB Trigger (Option)
Signal Speed Low Speed, Full Speed
Trigger condition SOP, EOP, RC, Suspend, Exit Suspend
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
18-7 [email protected]
RIGOL
Measure
Cursor
Chapter 18 Specifications
Auto
Measurement
Number of
Measurements
Measurement
Range
Measurement
Statistic
Frequency
Counter
18-8
Manual Mode
Track Mode
Voltage Deviation between Cursors ( △ V)
Time Deviation between Cursors ( △ T)
Reciprocal of △ T (Hz) (1/ △ T)
Voltage and Time Values of the Waveform
Point
Auto Mode Allow to display cursors during auto measurement
Analog channel:
Maximum, Minimum, Peak-Peak Value, Top Value, Bottom
Value, Amplitude, Average, Vrms-N, Vrms-1, Overshoot,
Pre-shoot, Area, Period Area, Period, Frequency, Rise Time,
Fall Time, Positive Pulse Width, Negative Pulse Width, Positive
Duty Cycle, Negative Duty Cycle, Delay A B , Delay
A B , Delay A B , Delay A B , Phase A B ,
Phase A B , Phase A B , Phase A B
Digital channel:
Frequency, Period, Positive Pulse Width, Negative Pulse Width,
Positive Duty Cycle, Negative Duty Cycle, Delay A B ,
Delay A B , Delay A B , Delay A B , Phase
A B , Phase A B , Phase A B , Phase A B
Display 5 measurements at the same time.
Screen or cursor
Current Value, Average, Max, Min, Standard Deviation,
Number of Measurements
Hardware 6 bits frequency counter
(channels are selectable)
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 18 Specifications RIGOL
Math Operation
Waveform
Operation
FFT Window
Function
A+B, A-B, A×B, A÷B, FFT, Digital Filter, Editable Advanced
Operation, Logic Operation
Rectangle, Hanning, Blackman, Hamming
FFT Display Split, Full Screen
FFT Vertical Scale Vrms, dB
Logic Operation AND, OR, NOT, XOR
Math Function Intg, Diff, Log, Exp, Sqrt, Sine, Cosine, Tangent
Number of Buses for Decoding
2
Decoding Type Parallel (standard), RS232/UART (option), I2C (option), SPI
(option), CAN (option)
Display
Screen Type
Display
Resolution
Display Color
8.0 inches (203 mm) TFT LCD display
800 Horizontal ×RGB×480 Vertical Pixel
160,000 Color (TFT)
Persistence Time Min, 50ms, 100ms, 200ms, 500ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s,
Infinite
Display Type Dots, Vectors
Real-time Clock Time and Date (user adjustable)
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
18-9 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 18 Specifications
Signal Source (MSO2000A-S/DS2000A-S)
Channels 2
Sample Rate
Vertical
Standard
Waveform
200 MSa/s
14 bits
Resolution
Max. Frequency 25 MHz
Sine, Square, Pulse, Ramp, Noise, DC
Built-in
Waveform
Sinc, Exponential Rise, Exponential Fall, ECG, Gauss, Lorentz,
Haversine
Sine 100 mHz to 25 MHz Frequency
Range
Flatness
Harmonic
Distortion
Stray
(Non-harmonic)
±0.5 dB (relative to 1 kHz)
-40 dBc
-40 dBc
Square/Pulse
Ramp
Total Harmonic
Distortion
S/N Ratio
Overshoot
Duty Cycle
1%
40 dB
Frequency
Range
Square: 100 mHz to 15 MHz
Pulse: 100 mHz to 1 MHz
Rise/Fall Time <15 ns
<5%
Square: 50%
Pulse: 10% to 90% (user adjustable)
1% or 10 ns (the larger of the two) Duty Cycle
Resolution
Min. Pulse
Width
20ns
10 ns or 5 bits (the larger of the two) Pulse Width
Resolution
Jitter
Frequency
Range
Linearity
500 ps
100 mHz to 100 kHz
1%
18-10
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 18 Specifications
Noise
Built-in
Waveform
Arbitrary
Waveform
Frequency
Amplitude
DC Offset
RIGOL
Symmetry
Bandwidth
0 to 100%
25 MHz (typical)
100 mHz to 1 MHz Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Waveform
Length
Internal
Storage
Location
Accuracy
100 mHz to 10 MHz
1 to 16 k points
10
100 ppm (lower than 10 kHz)
50 ppm (higher than 10 kHz)
100 mHz or 4 bits, the larger of the two Resolution
Output Range 20 mVpp to 5 Vpp, HighZ
10 mVpp to 2.5 Vpp, 50 Ω
Resolution 100 μV or 3 bits, the larger of the two
Accuracy
Range
2% (1 kHz)
±2.5 V, HighZ
±1.25 V, 50 Ω
Resolution
Accuracy
100 μV or 3 bits, the larger of the two
Offset setting Value±2%
I/O
Standard Ports USB HOST (support USB-GPIB), USB DEVICE, LAN, Aux
Output (TrigOut/PassFail)
PictBridge Printer
Compatibility
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
18-11 [email protected]
RIGOL Chapter 18 Specifications
General Specifications
Probe Compensation Output
Output Voltage [1] About 3 V, peak-peak
Frequency [1] 1 kHz
Power
Power Voltage
Power
Fuse
100 V to 240 V, 45 Hz to 440 Hz
Maximum 50 W
2 A, T Degree, 250 V
Environment
Temperature Range Operating: 0 ℃ to +50 ℃
Non-operating: -40 ℃ to +70 ℃
Cooling Method
Humidity Range
Fan cooling
0 ℃ to +30 ℃ : ≤95 % Relative Humidity
+30 ℃ to +40 ℃ : ≤75 % Relative Humidity
+40 ℃ to +50 ℃ : ≤45 % Relative Humidity
Altitude Operating: under 3,000 meters
Non-operating: under 15,000 meters
Physical Characteristics
Size [3] Width × Height × Depth = 361.6 mm × 179.6 mm ×
130.8 mm
Weight [4] Package Excluded 3.9 kg ± 0.5 kg
Package Included 4.5 kg ± 0.5 kg
Calibration Interval
The recommended calibration interval is one year.
Regulatory Information
Electromagnetic 2004/108/EC
Compatibility
Safety
Execution standard EN 61326-1:2006 EN 61326-2-1:2006
UL 61010-1:2004; CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 61010-1-2004;
EN 61010-1:2001; IEC 61010-1:2001
Note [1] : Typical.
Note [2] : Maximum value. 20ns, single-channel mode, dots display, auto memory depth.
Note [3] : Supporting legs and handle folded, knob height included.
Note [4] : Standard configuration.
18-12
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 19 Appendix RIGOL
Chapter 19 Appendix
Appendix A: Accessories and Options
Models
Description
DS2302A
DS2202A
DS2102A
DS2072A
DS2302A-S
DS2202A-S
300 MHz 2-analog channel oscilloscope
200 MHz 2-analog channel oscilloscope
100 MHz 2-analog channel oscilloscope
70M Hz
300 MHz
200 MHz
2-analog channel oscilloscope
2-analog channel oscilloscope +
2-channel 25 MHz signal source
2-analog channel oscilloscope +
2-channel 25 MHz signal source
Order
Number
DS2302A
DS2202A
DS2102A
DS2072A
DS2302A-S
DS2202A-S
DS2102A-S
DS2072A-S
MSO2302A
MSO2202A
MSO2102A
MSO2072A
100 MHz
70 MHz
300 MHz
200 MHz
100 MHz
70 MHz
2-analog channel oscilloscope +
2-channel 25 MHz signal source
2-analog channel oscilloscope +
2-channel 25 MHz signal source
DS2102A-S
DS2072A-S
2-analog channel + 16-digital channel mixed signal oscilloscope
MSO2302A
2-analog channel + 16-digital channel mixed signal oscilloscope
2-analog channel + 16-digital channel mixed signal oscilloscope
2-analog channel + 16-digital channel mixed signal oscilloscope
MSO2202A
MSO2102A
MSO2072A
MSO2302A-S 300 MHz
2-analog channel + 16-digital channel mixed signal oscilloscope
+ 2-channel 25 MHz signal source
2-analog channel + 16-digital
MSO2202A-S 200 MHz channel mixed signal oscilloscope
+ 2-channel 25 MHz signal source
MSO2202A-S 100 MHz 2-analog channel + 16-digital
MSO2302A-S
MSO2202A-S
MSO2102A-S
19-1 MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL Chapter 19 Appendix
Accessories
Options channel mixed signal oscilloscope
+ 2-channel 25 MHz signal source
2-analog channel + 16-digital
MSO2072A-S 70 MHz channel mixed signal oscilloscope
+ 2-channel 25 MHz signal source
Power Cord conforming to the standard of the country
MSO2072A-S
--
Standard
Accessories
Optional
Accessories
Memory
Depth
Option
Advanced
Trigger
Option
USB Cable
2 Passive Probes (350 MHz)
A logic analyzer probe (Only for MSO)
Quick Guide
Passive Probe (500 MHz)
Rack Mount Kit
USB-GPIB Interface Converter
Soft Carrying Bag
56 Mpts (single channel)/28 Mpts
(dual-channel)
Windows trigger, Nth edge trigger, HDTV trigger, delay trigger, timeout trigger, duration trigger, USB trigger
CB-USBA-USB
B-FF-150
PVP2350
RPL2316
--
RP3500A
RM-DS2000A
USB-GPIB
BAG-G1
MEM-DS2000A
AT-DS2000A
Decoding
Options
RS232, I2C, SPI decoding kit SD-DS2000A
CAN analysis kit (trigger and decoding) CAN-DS2000A
Note: All the options or accessories can be ordered from you local RIGOL Office.
19-2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Chapter 19 Appendix RIGOL
Appendix B: Warranty
RIGOL warrants that its products mainframe and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship within the warranty period.
If a product is proven to be defective within the respective period, RIGOL guarantees the free replacement or repair of products which are approved defective.
To get repair service, please contact with your nearest RIGOL sales or service office.
RIGOL does not provide other warranty items except the one being provided by this warranty statement. The warranty items include but not being subjected to the hint guarantee items related to tradable characteristic and any particular purpose.
RIGOL will not take any responsibility in cases regarding to indirect, particular and ensuing damage.
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
19-3 [email protected]
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Index
Index
- Duty ...................................... 6-18
- Width .................................... 6-18
+ Duty ..................................... 6-18
+ Width ................................... 6-18
Acquisition Mode ........................ 4-2
Amplitude Modulation .............. 13-19
AND ........................................ 6-10
Antialiasing ................................ 4-9
Area ........................................ 6-22
Auto IP .................................... 15-3
Auto Mode ............................... 6-38
Auto Setting ........................... 15-19
Aux Output ............................ 15-16
Average ..................................... 4-2
Bandwidth Limit .......................... 2-3
Blackman ................................... 6-6
CAN Decoding .......................... 8-17
CAN Trigger .............................. 5-49
Channel Coupling ........................ 2-3
Channel Label ............................. 2-7
CSV ......................................... 14-4
Cursor ..................................... 6-29
DC .......................................... 13-6
Delay ....................................... 6-19
Delay Calibration ......................... 2-9
Delay Trigger ............................ 5-29
Delayed Sweep ........................... 3-2
DHCP....................................... 15-3 digital bus .................................. 7-6 digital channel ............................ 7-1
Digital Filter ............................... 6-8
Domain Name Server ................ 15-5
Dots ........................................ 12-2
Duration Trigger ....................... 5-34
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
RIGOL
Duty Cycle ................................ 13-6
Edge Trigger .............................. 5-9
Edge Type ......................... 5-9, 5-19
Event Table ................................ 8-3
Expression ................................ 6-12
Factory ................................... 14-15
Fall Time .................................. 6-18
FFT ........................................... 6-5
Frequency ................................ 6-18
Frequency Counter .................... 6-23
Frequency Modulation .............. 13-21
Gate ........................................ 15-4
GPIB Address ............................ 15-7
Hamming .................................. 6-6
Hanning .................................... 6-6
High Resolution .......................... 4-4
Horizontal Reference................... 3-9
Horizontal Scale ......................... 3-8
I2C Decoding ............................ 8-10
I2C Trigger ............................... 5-41
Idle Time .................................. 5-20
Input Impedance ........................ 2-5
IP Address ................................ 15-4 logic analyzer ............................ 1-20
MAC ......................................... 15-6
Manual Mode ............................ 6-30 mDNS ...................................... 15-5
Memory Depth ........................... 4-8
Modulating Waveform .............. 13-20
Modulation Depth .................... 13-20
Modulation Deviation ............... 13-22
Modulation Frequency .............. 13-20
Network Status ......................... 15-2
Noise ....................................... 13-7
GlobalTestSupply
.com
RIGOL
Noise rejection ........................... 5-7
Normal ...................................... 4-2
NOT ........................................ 6-10
Nth Edge Trigger ...................... 5-19
Operator .................................. 6-14
Option Management ................ 15-17
OR .......................................... 6-10
Overshoot ................................ 6-22
Parallel Decoding ........................ 8-2
Pass/Fail Test ........................... 10-1
Pattern Setting ................. 5-27, 5-34
Pattern Trigger ......................... 5-27
Peak Detect ............................... 4-4
Period ..................................... 6-18
Period Area .............................. 6-22
Persistence Time ...................... 12-2
Phase ...................................... 6-19
Picture ..................................... 14-3
Preshoot .................................. 6-22
Pulse ....................................... 13-6
Pulse Condition ........................ 5-11
Pulse Polarity ........................... 5-14
Pulse Trigger ............................ 5-11
Pulse Width Setting................... 5-12
Qualifier .................................. 5-15
Ramp ...................................... 13-5
Record Constant On .................. 11-4
Rectangle .................................. 6-6
Reference Waveform ................... 9-1
Rise Time ................................ 6-18
Roll ........................................... 3-7
RS232 Decoding ......................... 8-5
RS232 Trigger .......................... 5-38
Runt Trigger ............................. 5-14
Sample Rate .............................. 4-6
Setup/Hold Trigger ................... 5-36
Setups ..................................... 14-3
Index
Signal Source ............................ 13-1
Sine ......................................... 13-3
Slope Condition ......................... 5-21
Slope Trigger ............................ 5-21
SPI Decoding ............................ 8-14
SPI Trigger ............................... 5-44
Square ..................................... 13-4
Static IP ................................... 15-3
Subnet Mask ............................. 15-4
Symmetry................................. 13-5
Sync ........................................ 5-24
Threshold ........................ 6-18, 6-25
Time Setting ............................. 5-22
TimeOut Trigger ........................ 5-32
Traces ...................................... 14-3
Track Mode ............................... 6-35
Trigger Coupling .......................... 5-5
Trigger Holdoff ............................ 5-6
Trigger Level ............................. 5-10
Trigger Mode .............................. 5-3
Trigger Position ......................... 5-17
Trigger Source ............................ 5-2
USB ......................................... 15-7
USB Trigger .............................. 5-47
Vamp ....................................... 6-21
Variable .................................... 6-13
Vavg ........................................ 6-21
Vbase ...................................... 6-21
Vectors .................................... 12-2
Vertical Expansion ....................... 2-7
Vertical Scale .............................. 2-6
Vertical Window ............... 5-15, 5-22
Video Polarity ........................... 5-24
Video Standard ......................... 5-25
Video Trigger ............................ 5-24
VISA ........................................ 15-6
Vmax ....................................... 6-21
2
Find Quality Products Online at:
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
Index
Vmin ....................................... 6-21
Vpp ......................................... 6-21
Vrms-1 .................................... 6-22
Vrms-N .................................... 6-21
Vtop ........................................ 6-21
Waveform Analysis .................... 11-8
Waveform Confusion ................... 4-6
Waveform Distortion ................... 4-6
Waveform Invert ......................... 2-5
Waveform Leakage ..................... 4-7
Waveform Playback ................... 11-6
RIGOL
Waveform Record ...................... 11-2
Waveforms ............................... 14-3
Window Function........................ 6-5
Windows trigger ........................ 5-17
Windows Type ........................... 5-17
X Cursor ................................... 6-29
XOR ......................................... 6-10
X-Y ............................................ 3-4
X-Y mode .................................. 6-39
Y Cursor ................................... 6-29
Y-T ............................................ 3-4
MSO2000A/DS2000A User’s Guide
Find Quality Products Online at: www.
GlobalTestSupply
.com
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 46 Chapter 1 Quick Start
- 46 General Inspection
- 46 Appearance and Dimensions
- 46 To Prepare the Oscilloscope for Use
- 46 To Adjust the Supporting Legs
- 46 To Connect to Power Supply
- 46 Power-on Inspection
- 46 To Connect the Probe
- 46 Function Inspection
- 46 Probe Compensation
- 46 Overview
- 46 Rear Panel Overview
- 46 Front Panel Function Overview
- 46 VERTICAL
- 46 HORIZONTAL
- 46 TRIGGER
- 46 CLEAR
- 46 RUN/STOP
- 46 SINGLE
- 77 Multifunction Knob
- 77 Navigation Knob
- 77 Function Keys
- 77 Signal Source
- 77 Record
- 77 Print
- 77 Logic Analyzer
- 77 User Interface
- 77 To Use the Security Lock
- 77 To Use the Built-in Help System
- 78 Chapter 2 To Set the Vertical System
- 78 To Enable the Analog Channel
- 78 Channel Coupling
- 78 Bandwidth Limit
- 78 Probe Ratio
- 78 Input Impedance
- 78 Waveform Invert
- 78 Vertical Scale
- 78 Vertical Expansion
- 78 Amplitude Unit
- 78 Channel Label
- 78 Delay Calibration of the Analog Channel
- 79 Chapter 3 To Set the Horizontal System
- 79 Delayed Sweep
- 79 Time Base Mode
- 79 Y-T Mode
- 79 X-Y Mode
- 79 Roll Mode
- 79 Horizontal Scale
- 79 Horizontal Reference
- 80 Chapter 4 To Set the Sample System
- 80 Acquisition Mode
- 80 Normal
- 80 Average
- 80 Peak Detect
- 142 High Resolution
- 142 Sample Mode
- 142 Sample Rate
- 142 LA Sample Rate
- 142 Memory Depth
- 142 LA Memory Depth
- 142 Anti-Aliasing
- 143 Chapter 5 To Trigger the Oscilloscope
- 143 Trigger Source
- 143 Trigger Mode
- 143 Trigger Coupling
- 143 Trigger Holdoff
- 143 Noise Rejection
- 143 Trigger Type
- 143 Edge Trigger
- 143 Pulse Trigger
- 143 Runt Trigger
- 143 Windows Trigger (Option)
- 143 Nth Edge Trigger (Option)
- 143 Slope Trigger
- 143 Video Trigger (HDTV Option)
- 143 Pattern Trigger
- 143 Delay Trigger (Option)
- 143 TimeOut Trigger (Option)
- 143 Duration Trigger (Option)
- 143 Setup/Hold Trigger
- 143 RS232 Trigger
- 143 I2C Trigger
- 143 SPI Trigger
- 143 USB Trigger (Option)
- 143 CAN Trigger (Option)
- 143 Trigger Output Connector
- 144 Chapter 6 MATH and Measurements
- 144 Math Operation
- 144 Addition
- 144 Subtraction
- 186 Multiplication
- 186 Division
- 186 Digital Filter
- 186 Logic Operation
- 186 Advanced Operation
- 186 MATH Label
- 186 Auto Measurement
- 186 Quick Measurement after AUTO
- 186 One-key Measurement of 29 Parameters
- 186 Frequency Counter Measurement
- 186 Measurement Setting
- 186 To Clear the Measurement
- 186 All Measurement
- 186 Statistic Function
- 186 Measurement History
- 186 Cursor Measurement
- 186 Manual Mode
- 186 Track Mode
- 186 Auto Mode
- 186 X-Y Mode
- 187 Chapter 7 Digital Channel
- 187 To Select the Digital Channel
- 187 To Move the Digital Channel
- 187 To Turn on/off the Digital Channel
- 187 Group Set
- 187 To Set the Waveform Display Size
- 187 Reorder Setting
- 187 To Set the Threshold
- 187 To Use the Digital Bus
- 187 To Set the Label
- 187 Digital Channel Delay Calibration
- 188 Chapter 8 Protocol Decoding
- 188 Parallel Decoding
- 188 RS232 Decoding (Option)
- 188 I2C Decoding (Option)
- 234 SPI Decoding (Option)
- 234 CAN Decoding (Option)
- 235 Chapter 9 Reference Waveform
- 235 To Enable REF Function
- 235 To Set the Color
- 235 To Select REF Source
- 235 To Save REF Waveform
- 235 To Adjust REF Waveform Display
- 235 To Export to Internal or External Memory
- 235 To Import from Internal or External Memory
- 236 Chapter 10 Pass/Fail Test
- 236 To Enable Pass/Fail Test
- 236 To Select Source
- 236 Mask Range
- 236 To Set Test Results Output Type
- 236 To Save the Test Mask
- 236 To Load the Test Mask
- 237 Chapter 11 Waveform Record
- 237 Waveform Record
- 237 Record Constant On
- 237 Waveform Playback
- 237 Waveform Analysis
- 237 Analysis Based on Trace
- 237 Analysis Based on Pass/Fail Mask
- 238 Chapter 12 Display Control
- 238 To Select the Display Type
- 238 To Set the Persistence Time
- 238 To Set the Waveform Intensity
- 238 To Set the Screen Grid
- 238 To Set the Grid Brightness
- 238 To Set the Menu Display
- 239 Chapter 13 Signal Source
- 239 Parameter Setting Method
- 239 To Output Basic Waveform
- 239 To Output Sine
- 288 To Output Square
- 288 To Output Ramp
- 288 To Output Pulse
- 288 To Output DC
- 288 To Output Noise
- 288 To Output Built-in Waveform
- 288 To Output Arbitrary Waveform
- 288 To Select Waveform
- 288 To Create Waveform
- 288 To Edit Waveform
- 288 Modulation
- 289 Chapter 14 Store and Recall
- 289 Storage System
- 289 Storage Type
- 289 Internal Storage and Recall
- 289 External Storage and Recall
- 289 Disk Management
- 289 To Select File Type
- 289 To Create a New File or Folder
- 289 To Delete a File or Folder
- 289 To Rename a File or Folder
- 289 To Clear the Local Memory
- 289 Factory
- 290 Chapter 15 System Function Setting
- 290 Remote Interface Configuration
- 290 LAN Setting
- 290 USB Device
- 290 GPIB Address
- 290 System-related
- 290 Sound
- 290 Language
- 290 System Information
- 290 Power-off Recall
- 290 System Time